Operating Instructions - Manuals for this Printer

: Paper
: CD-ROM
: Manuals for Administrator
: Manuals for Client
MANUALS FOR THIS PRINTER
Printed Manuals
MANUALS FOR THIS PRINTER (this sheet)
Quick Installation Guide
Option Setup Guide
Maintenance Guide
Manuals on CD-ROM (Labeled “Operating Instructions”)
Manuals for this Printer
Administrator Reference
Client Reference
PostScript 3 Supplement
Option Setup Guide
Maintenance Guide
If the manuals do not open automatically, double-click the following file on the CD-ROM.
Windows
Macintosh
MANUAL.EXE
manual
Printed manuals are also included as PDF files on the CD-ROM.
Windows / Macintosh
[Language]
option setup
mainte
Icons
Click to go to the top page where you can select other manuals.
Click to go to the next page.
Click to go to the table of contents of the viewed manual.
If you want to open multiple manuals at the same time, follow the procedure below:
From the [File] menu, point to [Preferences] and select [General...]. Clear the [Open
Cross-Doc Links in Same Window] check box in the [General Preference] dialog
box that appears.
G081-6500
Printed in the Netherland
Copyright © 2002
EE GB
Printer Installation
Quick Installation Guide
Provides information about setting up the printer.
This also provides information about installing the software with [Quick Install] and specifying
network settings from the control panel.
The Quick Installation Guide provides all the information you need to connect the printer to a
network with the network interface cable.
PREPARING THE PRINTER
Option Installation
Option Setup Guide
Provides information about setting up the options.
❑ Options
Network Printer Configuration
Administrator Reference
Provides information about setting up the printer as a print server and making printer settings
with the control panel.
❑ Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration
❑ Windows XP Print Server Configuration
❑ Windows NT4.0 Print Server Configuration
❑ NetWare Configuration
❑ Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin
❑ Using a Web Browser
❑ Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❑ Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel
PREPARING THE CLIENT COMPUTER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BEFORE YOU START
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
MANUALS PROVIDED
Printing from Computers (Operating Systems)
Client Reference
Provides information about setting up and using the printer in Windows, Macintosh or NetWare
environment, and also provides information about the software and utilities provided on the
CD-ROM.
❑ Windows 95/98/Me Configuration
❑ Windows 2000 Configuration
❑ Windows XP Configuration
❑ Windows NT 4.0 Configuration
❑ Macintosh Configuration
❑ NetWare Configuration
❑ Software and Utilities included on the CD-ROM
❑ Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
❑ Uninstalling the Printer Driver
❑ Sample Print/Locked Print
❑ Troubleshooting
PostScript 3 Supplement
Provides information about the meaning and features for the PostScript 3 printer driver.
❑ Using PostScript 3
❑ Printer Utility for Mac
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance Guide 1
Provides information about replacing consumables and cleaning and adjusting the printer.
❑ Getting Started
❑ Paper and Other Media
❑ Replacing Consumables and Maintenace Kit
❑ Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
❑ Troubleshooting
QUICK INSTALLATION GUIDE
<G081-6520>
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
• Place the machine on a strong and level surface.
Otherwise, the machine might fall and result in
an injury.
• If you use the machine in a confined space,
confirm that there is a continuous flow of air.
Optimum Environmental Conditions
Recommended temperature and humidity
%RH 10˚C 80%
80
15˚C 70%
27˚C 80%
27˚C 70%
32˚C
60%
60
40
15˚C 30%
15
27˚C 30%
10˚C 15%
10
32˚C 15%
20
%RH 50˚F 80%
80
59˚F 70%
˚C
30
80.6˚F 80%
80.6˚F 70%
89.6˚F
60%
60
40
59˚F 30%
15
80.6˚F 30%
50˚F 15%
50
60
89.6˚F 15%
70
80
90
˚F
Possible operation range
Recommended range
The machine must be level within 5 mm (0.2 inch) both front to
rear and left to right.
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, place this printer in a large well
ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3 (183
cubic inch)/hr/person.
If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on or severe
cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer.
Depending on the temperature and humidity around the machine,
vapor might occur when printing. Thus steam can be seen when
prints come out.
Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light
Dusty areas
Areas with corrosive gases
Areas excessively cold, hot, or humid
Locations near an air conditioner or humidifier
Locations near other electronic equipment
Locations where the printer might be subjected to
frequent strong vibration
Power Connection
Connect the power cord to a power source with the following
specifications:
❒ 120 V, 60 Hz
Space Required for Installing the Printer
Leave enough space around the printer. This space is necessary to
operate the printer. The recommended (or minimum) space
requirement is as follows:
B
C
A
D
ZHBH710E
A: 13 cm (5.2 inches) or more
B: 11 cm (4.4 inches) or more
C: 35 cm (14.0 inches) or more
D: 61 cm (24.4 inches) or more
Caution
• To prevent an injury, this printer should be lifted
by at least two people.
Check the contents of the box according to the
following list. If one or some items are missing,
please contact your sales or service
representative.
Important
❒ This package does not include an interface cable.
Please purchase one for use with your host
computer. See “Appendix” in the Administrator
Reference.
MANUALS FOR THIS PRINTER
Quick Installation Guide (This manual)
Maintenance Guide
Option Setup Guide
CD-ROM “Printer Drivers and Utilities”
CD-ROM “Operating Instructions”
CD-ROM “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”
Power Cable
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
Photo Conductor Unit (Black)
Photo Conductor Unit (Color)
Ferrite Core (2)
Additional Documents
Remove the plastic bag.
Lift the printer at least two people and move it to
the place where you want to install it.
When lifting the printer, use the inset grips on both sides of the
printer.
ZHBH750E
Important
❒ When installing the printer to a low position, be
careful not to get your hand or clothes caught under
the printer.
INSTALLING THE PHOTO
CONDUCTOR UNIT
Open the right cover of the printer.
ZHBH291E
Pull out the green levers on the left and right that
are fastening the inner cover, and then unlock.
ZHBH301E
Lift the inner cover until it stays up.
ZHBH311E
Take out the black photo conductor unit.
Peel off the tape, which is around Photo
Conductor Unit by peeling it downward, and
remove the cover on top of the Unit.
ZHBH681E
Push the front of the photo conductor unit slowly,
slide the unit on the cover, and then push the
unit in until it clicks.
ZHBHA680E
Important
❒ Do not remove the cover attached to the bottom of
the photo conductor unit yet.
❒ After you take the new Photo Conductor Unit out of
the bag, quickly install it.
ZHBH680E
Check the locations for each Photo Conductor Unit.
2
1
ZHBH720E
a Photo Conductor Unit (Black)
b Photo Conductor Unit (Color)
Match the green arrow at the tip of the photo
conductor unit to the rail inside the printer.
Important
❒ Make sure the green arrow fits securely on the rail
before proceeding to the next step.
ZHBH370E
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Caution
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
UNPACKING THE PRINTER AND
CHECKING THE CONTENTS OF
THE BOX
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Warning
• Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine
and freely accessible, so that in event of an
emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Only connect the machine to the power source
described on this manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any
modifications to the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an
electric shock or fire.
Important
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The printer’s location should be carefully chosen
because environmental conditions greatly affect its
performance.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Environments to Avoid
WHERE TO PUT THE PRINTER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Please read the Safety Information in the Maintenance Guide before using this machine.
It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
❒ If you do not attach the green arrow of the photo
conductor unit securely to the rail, you may damage
the photo conductor unit.
ZHBH390E
Repeat steps to
conductor unit.
to install the color photo
Lower the inner cover slowly.
ZHBH410E
Push the green lever to fasten the inner cover.
ZHBH420E
Close the right cover of the printer slowly.
ZHBH430E
Hold the toner cartridge horizontally as illustrated,
and then shake it back and forth about 10 times.
ZHBH460E
In the illustration, black cartridge is used as an example.
Important
❒ Do not open the shutter on the bottom of the toner
cartridge. Toner may spill.
ZHBH470E
Remove the adhesive tapes.
ZHBH910E
ZHBH481E
In the illustration, yellow cartridge is used as an example.
Push the toner cartridge in the direction of the
arrow to fasten the toner cartridge.
ZHBH491E
Repeat steps to , to install the other color
toner cartridges.
Close the upper left cover of the printer.
ZHBH500E
Note
❒ If the toner cartridge is not set properly, you cannot
close the upper left cover of this printer.
ZHBY010E
Note
❒ You cannot pull the Tray 1 out if the Bypass Tray is
open.
Remove the adhesive tape and packing material.
ZHBY920E
Press "Push", and then adjust the rear guide to
the paper size you want to load.
ZHBY040E
Adjust the side guides to the paper size you want
to load.
ZHBY060E
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Important
❒ Make sure that the top of the stack is not higher
than the limit mark inside the tray.
❒ The front and side guides should be set exactly to
the paper size to avoid paper misfeeds.
❒ Do not load different kinds of paper in the tray.
Slide the paper tray completely into the printer.
CONNECTING THE POWER
CORD
Warning
• It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands.
Doing this may result in receiving an electric
shock.
Caution
• When you pull the plug out of the socket, grip
the plug, not the cord, to avoid damaging the
cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
Important
❒ Be sure to connect the power plug to the socket or
the wall outlet firmly.
❒ The printer power must be off when plugging in and
out the power cord.
Confirm that the printer's power switch is off. If it
is on, turn it off.
ZHBH730E
Attach the power cord to the socket on the back
of the printer.
ZHBH030E
SELECTING THE PANEL
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Follow the procedure to select a language.
Note
❒ You can select one of the following languages:
English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish,
Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese,
Czech, Polish or Hungarian.
❒ The default setting is English.
❒ If you want to use the English panel display, it is
not necessary for you to take the following
procedures.
Turn on the printer.
ZHBH740E
After the machine warms up, “Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Take out the toner cartridge.
Pull the paper tray out of the printer until it stops.
After that, lift it slightly, and then pull it out
completely. Place it on a flat surface.
Load paper into the paper tray with the print side
up.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
ZHBH441E
Caution
• When pulling the paper tray out, be careful not
to pull it strongly. If you do, the tray might fall
and cause personal injury.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Open the upper left cover of the printer.
You can check the location for each toner cartridge by reading the
labels on the printer.
LOADING PAPER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Check the toner color and location are correct,
and then insert the toner cartridge vertically and
slowly.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
INSTALLING THE TONER
CARTRIDGE
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display
“Language”.
Menu:
Language
Press the {Enter #} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Language:
*English
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display
the language you want to select.
Press the {Enter #} key.
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
Menu:
Language
Press the {On Line} key.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
Press the {Menu} key.
ZHBS010E
The following message appears on the panel display.
Menu:
Paper Input
Go to sheet 2/2.
Plug the other end securely into the wall outlet.
Sheet 1/2
Press the {Menu} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “List/Test Print”.
Menu:
List/Test Print
Press the {Enter #} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
List/Test Print:
Config.Page
Confirm that “Config.Page” is on the display, and
then press the {Enter #} key.
In a short time, the test printing will start.
Printing...
Important
❒ If you cannot complete the test printing correctly,
see if an error message appears on the panel
display. For more information about error
messages, see “Troubleshooting” in the
Maintenance Guide.
Press the {On Line} key.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
Turn off the printer’s power switch.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Press the { ▲} or { ▼} key to display
"Maintenance", and then press the {Enter #} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display "Image
Density", and then press the {Enter #} key.
Maintenance:
Image Density
The following message appears on the panel display.
Image Density:
Prt.Test Sheet
Press the {Enter #} key.
The following massage appears on the panel display, and then Press
the {Enter #} key.
Prt.Test Sheet:
Press # to Start
Printing...
Compare the colors on the printed image density
test sheet with those on the Image Density
Adjusting Card.
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to select the color you
want to adjust, and then press the {Enter #} key.
Image Density
Black
Note
❒ You can adjust the image density from -10 to +10.
Increasing the value makes the printouts darker and
decreasing the value makes the printouts lighter.
❒ Pressing the {▲} or {▼} key makes the value
increase or decrease by one.
To adjust another color, repeat the steps
to .
Print another image density test sheet and check
if the colors on the test sheet now match those
on the Image Density Adjusting Card. If they still
do not match, adjust the image density again.
Press the {On Line} key.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
❖ Connecting the printer to a computer using
a network interface cable.
If your printer is installed with the Network
Interface Board, follow the procedures below.
Important
❒ The interface cable is not provided with the printer.
It is your responsibility to provide the interface
cable appropriate for the computer that you are
using.
Confirm that the printer's power switch is off. If it
is on, turn it off.
ZHBH730E
Loop the network interface cable and attach the
ferrite core.
Note
❒ Attach two ferrite cores to the network interface
cable. One of them must be attached close to the
end of the cable (on the end closet to the printer).
The other must be attached approximately 45 cm
(18") (A) apart from the end. Attach each ferrite
core with a loop.
ZHBP913E
Connect the network interface cable to the
Ethernet port on the back of the printer.
ZHBH1730E
Connect the other end of the cable to the network
, e.g. hab.
Confirm the LEDs on the Ethernet port.
○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ready
Menu:
Paper Input
0
Turn on the printer.
Attach the other end of the parallel cable to the
port of the computer. Secure the cable.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
After the machine warms up, “Ready” appears on the panel display.
Press the {Menu} key.
Black
(-10 +10)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ZHBH740E
To use the printer in its best condition, adjust the
image density.
CONNECTINGTHE PRINTER TO
A COMPUTER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Turn on the printer if it is not on yet.
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to set the image density
value, and then press the {Enter #} key.
ADJUSTING THE IMAGE
DENSITY
○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
You can check if the printer works properly by
printing a test page such as the configuration page.
However, you cannot check the connection
between the printer and the computer by printing
the test page.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PRINTING THE TEST PAGE
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sheet 2/2 (From sheet 1/2)
❖ Connecting the printer to a computer using
a USB cable.
Turn on the printer and the computer.
Go to
DRIVER”.
“INSTALLING THE PRINTER
ZESX338E
a is lit when 100 BASE-TX is in use and not lit when 10 BASE-T is
in use.
b is lit when the printer is securely connected to the network.
Go to
“CONFIGURING THE PRINTER FOR
THE NETWORK”.
❖ Connecting the printer to a computer using
a parallel cable.
Important
❒ The parallel cable is not provided with the printer.
It is your responsibility to provide the parallel cable
appropriate for the computer that you are using.
❒ The printer’s parallel connection is a standard bidirectional interface. It requires a standard 36-pin
parallel cable compliant with IEEE1284 and the
parallel port on the computer.
❒ To avoid electrical interference, use a shielded
cable.
Note
❒ Do not use a parallel cable longer than 2.5 meters
(8.2 feet).
Confirm that the printer’s power switch is off. If it
is on, turn it off.
Turn the computer off.
Attach the parallel cable to the port of the
printer. Secure the cable with the metal fittings
as shown in the illustration.
Important
❒ Rating voltage of the parallel port for the computer;
Max. DC 5V.
ZHBH010E
Important
❒ The interface cable is not provided with the printer.
It is your responsibility to provide the interface
cable appropriate for the computer that you are
using.
Connect the interface cable to the USB2.0
interface port.
ZHBP470E
Connect the other end of the interface cable to
the USB interface connector of the computer or
the USB Hub.
Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000
Gateway Address
000.000.000.000
Frame Type (NW)
Auto
Active Protocol
TCP/IP
Ethernet
Auto
The procedure below shows how to set the TCP/IP
protocol. Make the settings for the other items by
taking the same procedure.
Press the {Menu} key.
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
Menu:
Paper Input
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “Host
Interface”, and then press the {Enter #} key.
Menu:
Host Interface
The interface setiing menu appears.
Start the protocol for use.
A Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display
“Network Setup”, and then press the {Enter
#} key.
Host Interface:
Network Setup
B Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “Active
Protocol”, and then press the {Enter #} key.
Network Setup:
Active Protocol
TCP/IP:
*Active
Note
❒ * shows the current setting.
In about two seconds, the display returns to the “Active Protocol”
setting screen.
E Set the rest of the protocols for use.
F When all settings for the protocol are done,
press the {Escape} key.
The “Network Setup” setting screen appears.
Note
❒ The default settings for all of the protocols are
“Active”.
❒ It is recomended to set the unused protocols “Not
Active”.
When you use this machine under DHCP
environment, go to step . When you use this
machine with a fixed IP address, you must make
the setting for the required item after making the
setting for DHCP Off. Go to step .
Important
❒ When DHCP is On, you cannot make the setting for
the following menus:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Note
❒ Consult the network administrator for information
about how to make the setting for the network
Make the setting for DHCP Off.
A Press {▲} or {▼} to display “DHCP”, and
then press {Enter #}.
Network Setup:
DHCP
B Press {▲} or {▼} to display “Off”, and then
press {Enter #}.
DHCP:
*Off
Note
❒ Confirm the IP address to the network administrator.
A Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “IP
Address”, and then press the {Enter #} key.
Network Setup:
IP Address
The currently selected IP address appears.
Note
❒ When the {Enter #} key is pressed, the cursor moves
to the next field.
❒ When the {▲} or {▼} key is kept pressed for a few
seconds, the value chages by 10.
B Press the {▲} or {▼} key to set the value
for the field.
IP Address:
199.022.033.044
C Press the {Enter #} key.
The cursor moves to the next field.
D Repeat B and C to set the value for the rest
of the fields.
Set “Subnet Mask” and “Gateway Address” by
following the same procedure for setting the IP
address.
Important
❒ The subnet mask is the mask value to use a part of
the IP address as a network address. Confirm the
value to the network administrator.
❒ The gateway address is the address of the host or
router that acts as a gateway when interacting with
work stations in another network. Confirm the value
to the network administrator.
Note
❒ If you are not sure of the setting addresses, leave
them as default.
When all of the settings are done, press the
{On Line} key.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
Print the configuration page to confirm the settings
made.
You can install the printer drivers and software
easily from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”.
The supported operating systems are Windows 95/
98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows
NT 4.0.
Click [Quick Install] in the window of the CD-ROM
to install PCL5c and RPCS printer drivers. To install
the PostScript 3 printer driver, click the [PostScript
3 printer driver] button. For more information about
the PostScript 3 printer driver, see the Administrator
Reference or the Client Reference on the CD-ROM
labeled “Operating Instructions” depending on the
environment you use in.
When the TCP/IP protocol is used, SmartNetMonitor for Client will be installed as well.
When using with TCP/IP protocol, confirm the followings:
❒ The printer is connected to a network with
the network interface cable.
❒ The TCP/IP protocol is set.
❒ The IP address is set for the printer and the
computer.
Insert the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities” into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Select a language to change the interface
language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available:
Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English
(English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian),
Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian),
Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
Default interface language is English.
Select [Quick Install].
Click [Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement]
dialog box.
This is an example when English is selected in step
.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I
accept the agreement] to agree with the License
Agreement, and then click [Next].
Select the printer model you want to install in the
“Select Printer” dialog box.
Note
❒ For a network connection with TCP/IP, select the
printer whose IP address is displayed in [Connect
to].
❒ For parallel connection, select the printer whose
printer port is displayed in [Connect to].
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
011.022.033.044
D Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “Active”,
and then press the {Enter #} key.
Note
INSTALLING THE PRINTER
DRIVER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
On
IP Address
Active Protocol:
TCP/IP
Set the IP address for the printer.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DHCP
C Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display “TCP/
IP”, and then press the {Enter #} key.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
You must configure the printer setting using the
control panel when using in a network environment.
The following list is the items you can set and their
default settings.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER
FOR THE NETWORK
The following display appears while installing the printer driver.
When finished, the [Installation Completion] dialog box appears.
Note
❒ Under Windows 2000, the [Digital Signature Not
Found] dialog box may appear when installing the
printer driver. In this case, click [Yes] to continue
the installation.
❒ Under Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation]
dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Click [Finish].
Note
❒ A message directing to restart the computer may
appear. In this case, restart your computer to
complete the installation. If no a message appears,
go to step .
Click [Exit].
The installation is now complete.
See “PRINTING THE TEST PAGE” for printing the configuration
page.
❒ * shows the current setting.
In about two seconds, the display returns to the “Network Setup”
setting screen.
Copyright © 2002 G081-6520
Printed in The Netherlands
EE GB
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio CL3000, CL3000DN
Printed in The Netherlands
EE
GB
G081-6570
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Operating Instructions
Maintenance Guide
Getting Started
Paper and Other Media
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Troubleshooting
Appendix
For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read “Safety Information” in this manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.”
Power Source
220-240V, 50/60 Hz, 4A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This printer is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The printer contains 7 milliwat, 645 - 660 nanometer wavelength, AlGaInP Laser Diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact
with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms
have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
The following label is attached on the back of the printer.
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
802.11b Interface Unit TypeA(R-WL11):
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications
terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Laser Safety:
The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment.
The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is
not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This
printer contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Copyright © 2002
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page i Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trademarks.............................................................................................................1
Safety Information .................................................................................................2
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................2
ENERGY STAR Program .......................................................................................6
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................7
1. Getting Started
Features of this Printer..........................................................................................9
Guide to the Printer ............................................................................................. 10
Exterior: Front View.................................................................................................. 10
Basic Model Printer Exterior: Rear View .................................................................. 11
Network Standard Model Exterior: Rear View.......................................................... 12
Inside........................................................................................................................ 13
Control Panel ........................................................................................................... 14
2. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer........................................... 15
Paper Sizes.............................................................................................................. 15
Paper Recommendations......................................................................................... 18
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................... 22
Loading Paper in Tray 1/Optional Paper Feed Unit ................................................. 22
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray ........................................................................... 24
3. Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Toner Cartridge .................................................................................................... 29
Waste Toner Bottle Type 125.............................................................................. 32
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125 Black/Color .................................................... 34
Fusing Unit Type 125........................................................................................... 38
Intermediate Transfer Unit Type 125.................................................................. 42
4. Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Cautions to Take When Cleaning ....................................................................... 47
Adjusting the Color Registration........................................................................ 48
Adjusting the Image Density............................................................................... 49
Adjusting the Tray Registration ......................................................................... 51
i
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page ii Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
5. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel ................................................ 53
Printer Does Not Print ......................................................................................... 62
Other Printing Problems ..................................................................................... 65
Removing Misfed Paper ...................................................................................... 69
When "Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path" Appears .................................................. 69
When "Remove Misfeed B: Fusing Unit" Appears ................................................... 70
When "Remove Misfeed Y: Paper Tray" Appears.................................................... 72
When "Remove Misfeed Z: Duplex Unit" Appears ................................................... 73
6. Appendix
Moving and Transporting the Printer................................................................. 75
Moving the Printer .................................................................................................... 76
INDEX......................................................................................................... 77
ii
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 1 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in
those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
1
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 2 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Safety Information
When using your printer, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are
not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to
property.
2
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 3 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
R WARNING:
• It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock.
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible,
so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Only connect the machine to the power source described in the manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate
collection sites.
• Dispose of the used toner cartridge in accordance with the local regulation.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There
is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine
has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.
• Do not place the IC2 lithium battery near or into fire, or it will explode
and cause a burn.
• The User Account Enhance Unit installed on the controller board has
a IC2 lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the User Account Enhance Unit only with the indicated one.
3
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 4 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
R CAUTION:
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the equipment.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
"v" label (means hot surface). Touching a part with a "v" label (means hot
surface) could result in a burn.
• The fusing unit becomes very hot. When installing the new fusing unit, turn
off the printer and wait about 30 minutes. After that, install the new fusing
unit. Not waiting for the unit to cool down can result in a burn.
• Do not pull out the fusing unit forcefully. It may cause the unit to fall and result in an injury.
• When touching the fusing unit, do not touch any areas other than the handle
as it may cause a burn.
• Do not put an object on the right cover when it is open.
4
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 5 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing unit because it could
be very hot.
• To prevent an injury, this printer should be lifted by at least two people.
• When moving the machine, each person should hold the handles that are
located on opposite sides, and then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
• Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged
for at least half an hour. Components inside the machine become very hot,
and can cause a burn if touched.
• When moving the Paper Feed Unit, hold the handles that are located on the
top of the unit, and then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may
cause an injury.
• Do not touch the inside of the controller board compartment. It may cause a
machine malfunction or a burn.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric shock
might occur.
• Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, the machine
might fall and result in an injury.
• If you use the machine in a confined space, confirm that there is a continuous flow of air.
• When pulling the paper tray out, be careful not to pull it strongly. If you do,
the tray might fall and cause an injury.
• This product uses low frequency electromagnetic fields and may cause
harmful interference to sensitive medical implant devices. If you have a cardiac pacemaker or implantable defibrillator, please consult your doctor for
additional suggestion or advice.
5
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 6 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
❖ Low-power Mode (Energy Saver mode)
This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the
last operation has been completed. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode,
press any key on the control panel. For more information about how to configure Energy Saver mode, see “Making Printer Settings with Control Panel” in
the Administrator Reference on the CD-ROM labeled "Operating Instructions".
❖ Specifications
Energy Saver mode
6
Power Consumption
15 W or less
Default Time
60 minutes
Recovery Time
3 seconds or less
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 7 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed or data might be lost.
Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
7
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 8 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
8
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 9 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
1. Getting Started
Features of this Printer
❖ High Image Quality
True 1200 x 1200 dpi resolution provides high resolution. You can print various business documents in fine detail from presentations and newsletters
containing illustrations or graphics to catalogues, ads, and pictures. In addition, the built-in automatic color registration function assures high image
quality at all times.
❖ High Performance
By using an intermediate transfer belt with the single path method, we've
achieved short paper path architecture equivalent to the single drum method.
This printer is as compact as a monochrome printer but offers high performance output of 20 pages per minute (ppm) in black and white and 16 ppm in
full color. The printer performs duplex printing at the same speed as simplex
printing with the Interleave function installed. Also, by using induction-heating technology in the fusing unit, a short warm-up time after turning the
printer on has been achieved and also the recovery time from the Energy Saver mode has been reduced for fast printout when you want to print immediately. The printer also comes with our advanced-technology high-speed
controller that allows fast printing and time saving on the total printing time
for large-volume data.
❖ Ease of Use
With a compact body like our other A4 20-ppm monochrome printer, it takes
up minimum space. Also, the optional duplex unit is installed on the front
cover so you don't need extra space or cover opening space. Replacing consumables is easy so you don't need to spend time on maintenance.
By using induction-heating technology in the fusing unit, we've reduced the
time to reach the fusing temperature. And, the printer can reduce power consumption to the lowest level possible when idle.
Many different interface options such as a USB 2.0 interface or wireless LAN
can be installed in the printer according to your requirements.
9
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 10 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Getting Started
Guide to the Printer
Exterior: Front View
1
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
ZHBH020E
1. Standard Tray
5. Front Cover
Output is stacked here with the print side
down.
Open this cover when replacing the fusing unit or transfer roller, installing the
Duplex Unit, or removing misfed paper.
2. Upper Left Cover
Open this cover when replacing toner
cartridges.
3. Ventilator
The ventilator helps to keep the components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block the ventilator as it may
cause a printer malfunction due to overheating.
4. Control Panel
Contains keys for printer control and a
panel display that shows the printer status.
10
6. Bypass Tray
Use to print onto thick paper, OHP transparencies, custom size paper, and envelopes as well as plain paper. When
printing on custom size paper , printer
driver settings are required.
7. Tray 1
Up to 530 sheets of plain paper can be
loaded.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 11 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Guide to the Printer
Basic Model Printer Exterior: Rear View
1
4
5
6
7
1
2
8
9
3
10
ZHBH031E
1. Ventilator
5. Controller Board
The ventilator helps to keep the components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block the ventilator as it may
cause a printer malfunction due to overheating.
Slide this out when installing options
such as Memory Unit, Printer Hard Disk,
1394 Interface Unit, 802.11b Interface
Unit, USB2.0 Interface Unit or User Account Enhance Unit.
2. Right Cover
6. Parallel Port
Open this cover when replacing photo
conductor units, the transfer belt or waste
toner bottle.
Use a parallel cable to connect the printer
to the computer.
3. Power Switch
Use a USB cable to connect the printer to
the host computer.
Use this switch to turn the power on and
off.
4. Standard Tray Extension
Pull out this extension when printing on
paper of its length is longer than that of
A4 or 8 1/2” × 11”.
7. USB Port
8. Ventilator
The ventilator helps to keep the components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block the ventilator as it may
cause a printer malfunction due to overheating
9. Optional Paper Feed Unit Connector
Use the Paper Feed Unit connector to
connect the printer to the Paper Feed
Unit.
10. Power Port
Connect the power cable to this port and
the other end of the cable to the outlet.
ZHBH700E
11
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 12 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Getting Started
Network Standard Model Exterior: Rear View
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
11
ZHBH030E
1. Ventilator
5. Controller Board
The ventilator helps to keep the components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block the ventilator as it may
cause a printer malfunction due to overheating.
Slide this out when installing options
such as Memory Unit, Printer Hard Disk,
1394 Interface Unit, 802.11b Interface
Unit, USB2.0 Interface Unit or User Account Enhance Unit.
2. Right Cover
6. Parallel Port
Open this cover when replacing photo
conductor units, the transfer belt or waste
toner bottle.
Use a parallel cable to connect the printer
to the computer.
3. Power Switch
Use a USB cable to connect the printer to
the host computer.
Use this switch to turn the power on and
off.
4. Standard Tray Extension
Pull out this extension when printing on
paper of its length is longer than that of
A4 or 8 1/2” × 11”.
7. USB Port
8. Ethernet Port
Use a network interface cable to connect
the printer to the network.
9. Ventilator
The ventilator helps to keep the components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block the ventilator as it may
cause a printer malfunction due to overheating
10. Optional Paper Feed Unit Connector
Use the Paper Feed Unit connector to
connect the printer to the Paper Feed
Unit.
ZHBH700E
11. Power Port
Connect the power cable to this port and
the other end of the cable to the outlet.
12
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 13 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Guide to the Printer
Inside
1
4
1
5
6
7
2
3
ZHBH040E
1. Fusing Unit
5. Photo Conductor Unit Color/Black
Fuses the image on paper.
When "Replace Fusing Unit" appears on
the panel display, replace this unit.
When "Replace Color PCU" or "Replace
Black PCU" appears on the panel display,
replace the indicated Photo Conductor
Unit.
2. Transfer Roller
When "Replace Fusing Unit" appears on
the panel display, replace this roller.
3. Duplex Unit (optional for Basic
6. Transfer Belt
When "Replace Transfer Belt" appears on
the panel display, replace this unit.
Model Printer)
7. Waste Toner Bottle
Use to print on both sides of paper.
Collects waste toner. When "Replace
Waste Toner" appears on the panel display, replace this bottle.
4. Toner Cartridges
When "Add Toner (color)" appears on the
panel display, replace the indicated color
of the toner cartridge.
13
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 14 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Getting Started
Control Panel
1
ZHBSA010E
1. Panel Display
5. {Menu}} Key
Shows the current status of the printer
and error messages.
Press this key to make and check the current printer settings.
2. {Job Reset}} Key
6. Power Indicator
When the printer is online, press this key
to cancel any ongoing print job.
Power indicator is on while the power
switch is on. Power indicator is off when
the power is turned off or while the printer is in Energy Saver mode.
3. {On Line}} Key
Indicates whether the printer is online or
offline.
Press this key to switch between online
and offline.
When the lamp is lit, the printer is online,
enabling data reception from the host
computer.
When the lamp is off, the printer is offline, disabling data reception from the
host computer.
Press this key to return to the ready condition.
4. {Form Feed}} Key
When the printer is offline, press this key
to print all the data left in the printer's input buffer.
You can use this to force the printer to
print the data received in the online status when the paper size or type does not
match with the actual set size or type.
14
7. Error Indicator
Lights when a printer error occurs. Goes
off when the printer goes in Energy Saver
mode.
8. Data In Indicator
Blinks while the printer is receiving data
from a computer. Stays on when there is
data to be printed.
9. {Escape}} Key
Press this key to return to the previous
condition on the panel display.
10. {Enter #}} Key
Press this key to execute menu items selected on the panel display.
11. {U}{T} Keys
Use these keys to increase or decrease
values on the panel display when making
settings. Keep pressing the key to quicken scrolling, and increase or decrease values on the panel display in units of 10.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 15 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
2. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This
Printer
Paper Sizes
This section describes the paper size, feed direction, and the maximum amount
of paper that can be loaded into each paper tray in this printer.
Note
❒ The following symbols and terminology are used to represent the feed direction.
In this manual
On the panel display
A4 (210 × 297)
K ↑ (Feed direction)
8 1/2 × 11
Paper feed direction
Short-edge feed direction
❒ Be careful of the paper feed direction. The direction is determined for each paper size.
210 × 297
K
182 × 257
A5
K
148 × 210
A6
K
105 × 148
Legal (LG, 8 /2 × 14 inches)
K
216 × 356
Letter (LT, 81/2 × 11 inches)
K
216 × 279
5 /2 × 8 /2 inches
K
140 × 216
Executive (Exec., 71/4 × 101/2 inches) K
184 × 276
1
1
1
Folio (81/4 × 13 inches)
K
210 × 330
Foolscap (F4, 81/2 × 13 inches)
K
216 × 330
F/GL (8 × 13 inches)
K
203 × 330
K
104.8 × 241.3
Com#10 Env (4 /8 × 9 /2 inches)
1
1
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2/3)
K
B5 JIS
Tray 1
Size (mm)
A4
Bypass Tray
Feed direction
❖ Input Paper Sizes (Metric version)
15
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 16 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
162 × 229
K
114 × 162
DL Env (4.33 × 8.66 inches)
K
110 × 220
Monarch Env (3 7/8 × 7 1/2 inches)
K
98.4 × 190.5
Custom Size
-
-
K
195 × 267
16K (7.68 × 10 /2 inches)
1
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2/3)
K
C6 Env (4.49 × 6.38 inches)
Tray 1
C5 Env (6.38 × 9.02 inches)
Bypass Tray
Size (mm)
2
Feed direction
Paper and Other Media
•
Means that the size is supported and the printer selects the paper size automatically.
•
Means that the size is supported. See p.24 “Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray”.
•
Means that the size is supported but the paper size should be set with the
control panel as a custom size. The supported size is approximately 90 216 mm in width and 148 - 356 mm in length.
•
Means that the size is not supported.
16
81/2 × 14
Letter (LT)
K
81/2 × 11
5 1/2 × 8 1/2 inches
K
51/2 × 81/2
Executive (Exec.)
K
71/4 × 101/2
A4
K
8.26 × 5.83
B5 JIS
K
7.17 × 10.12
A5
K
5.83 × 8.26
A6
K
4.13 × 5.63
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2/3)
K
Tray 1
Size (inch)
Legal (LG)
Bypass Tray
Feed direction
❖ Input Paper Sizes (Inch version)
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 17 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
81/4 × 13
Foolscap F4
K
81/2 × 13
F/GL
K
8 × 13
Com#10 Env
K
4 1/8 × 9 1/2
C5 Env
K
6.38 × 9.02
C6 Env
K
4.49 × 6.38
DL Env
K
4.33 × 8.66
Monarch Env
K
3 7/8 × 7 1/2
Custom Size
-
-
16K
K
7.68 × 101/2
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2/3)
K
Tray 1
Size (inch)
Folio
Bypass Tray
Feed direction
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
2
•
Means that the size is supported and the printer selects the paper size automatically.
•
Means that the size is supported. See p.24 “Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray”
•
Means that the size is supported but the paper size should be set with the
control panel as a custom size. The supported size is approximately 3.5 8.5 inches in width and 5.8 - 14 inches in length.
•
Means that the size is not supported.
❖ Paper weight and number of sheets to be set
Supported paper weight
Maximum number of
sheets (plain paper) *1
Tray 1
60 - 105 g/m2
(16 - 28 lb. Bond)
530 (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Bypass Tray
60 - 165 g/m2
(16 - 90 lb. Index)
100 (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000
60 - 105 g/m2
(16 - 28 lb. Bond)
530 (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
*1
Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray.
17
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 18 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
Paper Recommendations
Loading Paper
Important
❒ Do not use paper that is meant for an ink-jet printer, or it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper misfeed.
❒ Set the paper as described below
• Tray 1: Print side facing up
• Paper Feed Unit: Print side facing up
• Bypass Tray: Print side facing down
❒ Print quality cannot be guaranteed if paper other than the ones recommended
is used. For more information about recommended paper, contact your sales
or service representative.
2
Storing Paper
• Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage. Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep paper in the package in which the paper came.
Types of Paper and Other Media
❖ Plain Paper
• Plain paper refers to paper up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond). If you print on paper heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond), use the Bypass Tray.
• Any input tray can be used.
• Tray 1 can hold up to 530 sheets.
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000 can hold up to 530 sheets.
(Up to two units can be installed to the printer.)
The Bypass Tray can hold up to 100 sheets.
Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside
the tray.
• The Bypass Tray supports custom size paper approximately 90 to 216 mm
(3.5 to 8.5 inches) in width, and approximately 148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14
inches) in length.
18
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 19 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
• When printing on the reverse side of plain paper that has been already
printed on, load it on the Bypass Tray with print side down, and then select
[Plain:Dup. Back] with the control panel or the printer driver. Only the Bypass Tray supports this function.
❖ Thick Paper
• Thick paper refers to paper between 106 g/m2 (28.2 lb. Bond) to 165 g/m2
(90 lb. Index).
• Use the Bypass Tray and select the thick paper mode with the control panel
or printer driver. Tray 1 or Paper Feed Unit cannot be used.
• Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside
the tray.
• When printing on the reverse side of thick paper that has been already
printed on, load it on the Bypass Tray with print side down, and then select
[Thick:Dup. Back] with the control panel or the printer driver. Only the Bypass Tray supports this function.
2
Note
❒ The number of sheets to be set may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type.
❒ There may be noise when printing on thick paper. This is not a malfunction.
❖ Thin Paper
• Thin paper refers to paper between 60g/m2 (16 lb.Bond) to 70g/m2 (19
lb.Bond).
• Set the printer to Thin Paper mode using the control panel.
Reference
See “Specifying a paper type” or p.27 “Specifying a paper type for the Bypass Tray”.
❖ Glossy Paper
• Glossy paper refers to paper 130 g/m2 (100 lb Text).
• Use the Bypass Tray and select glossy paper mode with the printer driver.
Tray 1 or Paper Feed Unit cannot be used.
❖ OHP transparencies
When printing on an OHP transparency that has a print side, be sure to print
on the print side. Otherwise, it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper
misfeed.
Print quality cannot be guaranteed if OHP transparencies other than the ones
recommended is used. For more information about recommended OHP
transparency, contact your sales or service representative.
• Use the Bypass Tray. Tray 1 or Paper Feed Unit cannot be used.
• The Bypass Tray can hold up to 50 sheets.
19
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 20 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
• Separate stuck OHP transparencies every time before printing.
• If OHP transparencies stick together when they feed, set them on the tray
one by one or select "Slip sheet" in the printer driver. For more information
about using "Slip sheet", see the printer driver's Help.
• Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside
the tray.
• When printing on OHP transparencies, select the Transparency mode with
the control panel or the printer driver.
• Remove OHP transparencies from the tray after use to prevent them from
sticking to each other.
2
❖ Envelopes
• Use the Bypass Tray. Tray 1 and the Paper Feed Unit cannot be used.
• The Bypass Tray can hold up to 10 envelopes.
• Load envelopes in the Bypass Tray with the print side down.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Do not forcibly push envelopes when loading.
• Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside
the tray.
• Use flat envelopes with no curl. If they have a curl, flatten them.
• Use completely flat envelopes that contain no air inside.
• Do not print on both sides of envelopes.
• Do not use the following envelopes:
Envelopes with multiple flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip
Envelopes with windows or clasps
Envelopes made of paper that is not supported by this printer (See p.20
“Paper not supported by this printer”)
• We recommend setting the margins to at least 15 mm (0.6 inch) for all four
directions.
• Envelopes may wrinkle or print quality may be poor depending on the
characteristics of the envelope such as weight and stiffness.
• See p.15 “Paper Sizes” for the supported sizes of envelopes.
❖ Paper not supported by this printer
Avoid using the following paper as they are not supported by this printer.
• Paper meant for an ink-jet printer
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
20
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 21 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Damp paper
Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead
Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper and
conductive paper
Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation.
Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
Adhesive label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
Paper with clips or staples
2
Print Area
The following shows the print area for this printer. Be sure to set the print margins correctly by the application.
A
B
C
: Print area
: Feed direction
: Approx. 5 mm (0.2 inch)
Note
❒ The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings.
21
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 22 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
Loading Paper
R CAUTION:
• When pulling the paper tray out,
be careful not to pull it strongly. If
you do, the tray might fall and
cause an injury.
2
C Adjust the side guides to the paper size you want to load.
Loading Paper in Tray
1/Optional Paper Feed Unit
A Pull
the paper tray out of the
printer until it stops. After that,
lift it slightly, and then pull it out
completely. Place it on a flat surface.
ZHBY060E
D Load
paper into the paper tray
with the print side up.
ZHBY010E
Note
❒ You can not pull Tray 1 out if
the Bypass Tray is open.
B Press "Push", and then adjust the
rear guide to the paper size you
want to load.
ZHBY020E
Important
❒ Make sure that the top of the
stack is not higher than the limit
mark inside the tray.
❒ The side guides should be set
exactly to the paper size to
avoid paper misfeeds.
❒ Do not load different kinds of
paper in the tray.
E Slide
the paper tray completely
into the printer.
ZHBY040E
22
Important
❒ Be sure to insert the paper tray
completely. Otherwise, misfeeds might occur.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 23 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Loading Paper
Changing paper size of the paper tray
A Pull
D Adjust the side guides to the paper size you want to load.
the paper tray out of the
printer until it stops. After that,
lift it slightly, and then pull it out
completely. Place it on a flat surface
2
ZHBY060E
E Load
paper into the paper tray,
with the print side up.
ZHBY010E
B Remove the paper.
ZHBY020E
ZHBY030E
C Press "Push", and then adjust the
rear guide to the paper size you
are using.
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
F Slide
the paper tray completely
into the printer.
Specifying a paper type
ZHBY040E
By selecting the paper type you want
to load, the printer can perform printing better.
You can select from the following paper types:
• Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched,
Bond Paper, Cardstock
23
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 24 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
Note
❒ When selecting "Plain Paper", select either "Thin" or "Normal" for
"PlainPaper Type" in the "Maintenance" menu.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
2
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Input", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Type", and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
Paper Input:
Paper Type
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Tray 1", and then press the
{Enter #}
} key.
Paper Type:
Tray 1
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display the loaded paper type, and
then press the {Enter #}
} key.
Tray 1:
Recycled Paper
In about two seconds, “Menu” appears on the panel display.
F Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
24
Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray
In addition to plain paper, you can
load thick paper, envelopes, glossy
paper and OHP transparencies onto
the Bypass Tray.
Note
❒ Paper sizes supported by the Bypass Tray can be 90 - 216 mm (3.5 8.5 inches) in width, and 148 - 356
mm (5.8 - 14 inches) in length.
❒ The paper size selected with the
printer driver overrides the one selected with the control panel. You
do not have to make settings with
the control panel if you have already made them with the printer
driver. However, when using a
printer driver other than the RPCS
printer driver, you must make the
settings using the control panel.
For more information about the
printer driver, see the printer driver's Help. Also, see p.27 “Specifying a paper type for the Bypass
Tray”.
❒ If you load thick paper, or plain or
thick paper that has been already
printed on one side, make the settings for the paper type with the
control panel or the printer driver.
See p.26 “Specifying a custom paper size for the Bypass Tray”.
❒ The number of pages that can be
loaded in the Bypass Tray differs
depending on the paper type.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 25 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Loading Paper
A Open the Bypass Tray.
D Adjust the side guides to the paper width.
2
ZHBY070E
B Extend the Bypass Tray.
ZHBY100E
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
❒ Shuffle the paper before loading
the stack onto the tray so multiple sheets are not fed in at the
same time.
ZHBY080E
A,
C Slide the side guides outwardA
and then load paper until it stops
with the print side down B.
E Set the paper size using the control panel as follows:
A Press the {Menu}
} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Input", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
ZHBY090E
C Confirm that "Bypass Size" is
displayed, and then press the
{Enter #}
} key.
Paper Input:
Bypass Size
25
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 26 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display the size and direction of
the paper in the Bypass Tray.
Bypass Size:
8 1/2 × 13
play "Paper Input", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
In about two seconds, “Menu”
appears on the panel display.
E Press the {On Line}
} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel
display.
2
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
Specifying a custom paper size for the
Bypass Tray
Specify the paper size with the control panel when you load custom size
paper.
Note
❒ The printer cannot print from applications that do not support custom paper size.
❒ Set the vertical value for A, and set
the horizontal value for B.
C Confirm that "Bypass Size" is displayed, and then press the {Enter
#}
} key.
Paper Input:
Bypass Size
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Custom size", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Bypass Size:
Custom Size
E Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
vertical value, and then press the
{Enter #}
} key.
Custom Size:
Vert.
150mm
The unit on the panel display can
be changed to inches with the control panel.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
horizontal value, and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
ZHBY110E
A Press the {Menu}} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Custom Size:
Horiz.
200mm
In about two seconds, "Menu" appears on the display panel.
G Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
26
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 27 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Loading Paper
Specifying a paper type for the Bypass
Tray
By selecting the paper type you want
to load, the printer can perform printing better.
You can select from the following paper types:
• Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,
Preprinted, Prepunched, Labels
(adhesive label paper), Bond Paper, Cardstock, Transparency
(OHP transparency), Thick Paper,
Plain:Dup.Back (reverse side of
plain paper), Thick:Dup.Back (reverse side of thick paper), Glossy
Paper
Note
❒ When selecting "Plain Paper",
select either "Thin" or "Normal"
for "PlainPaper Type" in the
"Maintenance" menu.
Important
❒ You must specify the paper type
when using thick paper, adhesive label paper, OHP transparencies, or when printing on
plain or thick paper that has already been printed on one side.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Type", and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
Paper Input:
Paper Type
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
2
play "Bypass Tray", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Paper Type:
Bypass Tray
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display the loaded paper type, and
then press the {Enter #}
} key.
Bypass Tray:
Thick Paper
F Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Input", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
27
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 28 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Paper and Other Media
2
28
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 29 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
3. Replacing Consumables
and Maintenance Kit
Toner Cartridge
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust is
flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open
flame. Disposal should take
place at an authorized dealer
or an appropriate collection
site. If you dispose of the used
toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations.
Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color when the following
message appears on the panel display.
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and
the toner cartridge out of reach
of children.
Note
❒ The color is displayed for XXX.
❒ If cyan, magenta or yellow toner
runs out, you can print in black
and white using the black toner.
Change the color mode setting to
"Black and White" with the printer
driver.
❒ If black toner runs out, printing is
not possible until the black toner
cartridge is replaced.
Note
❒ The actual printable numbers vary
depending on the image volume
and density, number of pages to be
printed at a time, paper type and
paper size used, and environmental conditions such as temperature
and humidity. The quality of toner
lowers in time. Because of this, the
toner cartridge may require replacement earlier than expected.
We recommend that you prepare a
new toner cartridge beforehand.
Add Toner
XXX/XXX
or
Toner is Almost
Empty:XXX
A Open the upper left cover of the
printer.
ZHBH440E
29
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 30 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
B Remove
the toner cartridge for
the color you want to replace.
Important
❒ Do not open the shutter at the
bottom of the toner cartridge.
The toner may spill.
3
ZHBH900E
You can remove all four cartridges
in the same way.
In the illustration, yellow cartridge
is used as an example.
Important
❒ Do not shake the removed toner
cartridge. The remaining toner
may spill.
ZHBH470E
E Check that the toner color and location are correct, and then insert
the toner cartridge vertically and
slowly.
C Take
out a new toner cartridge
from the package.
D Shake
the toner cartridge back
and forth about 10 times.
ZHBH480E
ZHBH460E
In the illustration, black cartridge
is used as an example.
30
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 31 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Toner Cartridge
F Insert the
toner cartridge in the
direction of the arrow.
You can install all four cartridges
in the same way.
3
ZHBH490E
Important
❒ Do not repeatedly install and remove the toner cartridges. This
could result in a toner leak.
G Close the upper left cover of the
printer.
ZHBH500E
Note
❒ If the toner cartridge is not installed properly, you cannot
close the upper left cover of the
printer.
31
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 32 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Waste Toner Bottle Type 125
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust is
flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open
flame. Disposal should take
place at an authorized dealer
or an appropriate collection
site. If you dispose of the used
toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations.
3
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and
the toner cartridge out of reach
of children.
D Unlock the waste toner bottle.
ZHBH630E
Important
❒ Do not lock the waste toner bottle that has been removed. Toner may spill.
• Do not put an object on the right
cover when it is open.
Replace the waste toner bottle when
the following message appears on the
panel display.
Replace
Waste Toner
ZHBH640E
A Turn off the power.
B Open the right cover.
E Remove the used waste toner bottle slowly.
ZHBH290E
C Take out a new waste toner bottle
from the bag.
32
ZHBH650E
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 33 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Waste Toner Bottle Type 125
F Place the new waste toner bottle
in the position as shown in the illustration.
3
ZHBH660E
G Lock the waste toner bottle.
ZHBH670E
Important
❒ Be sure to lock the waste toner
bottle to prevent toner from
leaking inside the printer.
H Close the right cover slowly.
ZHBH430E
I Turn on the power.
33
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 34 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Black/Color
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust is
flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open
flame. Disposal should take
place at an authorized dealer
or an appropriate collection
site. If you dispose of the used
toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations.
3
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and
the toner cartridge out of reach
of children.
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125 Black
ZHBH680E
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125 Color
• Do not put an object on the right
cover when it is open.
Replace the black or color photo conductor unit when the following message appears on the panel display.
ZHBH690E
Replace
Black PCU
or
A Turn off the power.
B Open the right cover.
Replace
Color PCU
Check the contents of the box for the
following items:
ZHBH290E
34
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 35 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125 Black/Color
C Pull out the green levers on the
left and right that are fastening
the inner cover to unlock the levers.
B Pull out the photo conductor
unit slowly.
3
ZHBH330E
ZHBH300E
D Lift the inner cover until it stays
up.
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Color
A Pinch the green lever to unlock
the unit.
ZHBH310E
E Remove the photo conductor unit.
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Black
ZHBH340E
B Pull out the photo conductor
unit slowly until it stops.
A Pinch the green lever to unlock
the unit.
ZHBH350E
ZHBH320E
35
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 36 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
C Pinch the green part to unlock.
Important
❒ Do not remove the cover attached to the bottom of the photo conductor unit yet.
❒ After you take the new Photo
Conductor Unit out of the bag,
quickly install it.
H Align the green arrow at the tip of
3
ZHBHa910E
D Pull out the photo conductor
unit slowly.
Important
❒ Be sure to hold the unit with
both hands, and then pull it
out slowly.
the photo conductor unit to the
rail inside the printer.
Important
❒ Make sure the green arrow fits
securely on the rail before proceeding to the next step.
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Black
F Take out the new photo conductor unit.
G Peel off the tape, which is around
Photo Conductor Unit by peeling
it downward, and remove the cover on top of the Unit.
ZHBH370E
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Color
ZHBH681E
ZHBH380E
ZHBHA680E
36
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 37 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Photo Conductor Unit Type 125 Black/Color
I Push the front of the photo conductor unit slowly, sliding the
unit on the cover and into the machine until it stops.
J Lower the inner cover slowly.
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Black
3
ZHBH410E
K Push the green lever to fasten the
inner cover.
ZHBH390E
❖ Photo Conductor Unit Type 125
Color
ZHBH420E
L Close the right cover slowly.
ZHBH400E
Important
❒ If you do not attach the green
arrow of the photo conductor
unit securely to the rail, you
may damage the photo conductor unit.
ZHBH430E
M Turn on the power.
37
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 38 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Fusing Unit Type 125
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
3
• The fusing unit becomes very
hot. When installing the new fusing unit, turn off the printer and
wait about 30 minutes. After that,
install the new fusing unit. Not
waiting for the unit to cool down
can result in a burn.
❖ Fusing Unit
ZHBH200E
❖ Transfer Roller
• Do not pull out the fusing unit
forcefully. It may cause the unit
to fall and result in an injury.
• When touching the fusing unit,
do not touch any areas other
than the handle as it may cause
a burn.
Replace the fusing unit when the following message appears on the panel
display.
Replace Fusing
Unit Soon
or
Important
❒ Be sure to make the setting from
the control panel after replacing
the fusing unit. Without it, the procedure is incomplete.
A Turn off the power.
Replace
Fusing Unit
Check the contents of the box for the
following items:
38
ZHBH590E
Important
❒ To prevent a burn, after the
power is turned off, be sure to
wait about 30 minutes until the
fusing unit cools down before
touching the fusing unit.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 39 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Fusing Unit Type 125
B Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
E Remove the fusing unit slowly.
3
ZHBH230E
ZHBP281E
C Pinch
the connector lever, and
then pull out the connector.
F Take
out the new fusing unit
from the box.
G Place the unit as shown, and then
insert the new fusing unit slowly.
ZHBH210E
D Push the green release buttons on
the left and right outwards to unlock the fusing unit.
ZHBH240E
H Insert
the fusing unit until it
clicks, and then check that the
unit is locked.
ZHBH220E
ZHBH250E
39
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 40 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
I Push in the connector.
3
L Hold the green part as shown, and
then insert the transfer roller into
the printer.
ZHBH260E
J Turn the green part in the direc-
tion of the arrow, and then remove the transfer roller.
ZHBH620E
Important
❒ The end with a longer shaft
must be on the left.
M Close the front cover slowly.
N Turn on the power.
O Make the setting from the control
panel.
ZHBH600E
K Take out the new transfer roller.
Important
❒ Do not touch the roller part.
When "Replace Fusing Unit"
Appears on the Panel Display
A If the following message is on
the control panel, press the {Escape}
} key for more than five
seconds. The message disappears and a maintenance reset
is performed automatically.
Replace
Fusing Unit
ZHBH610E
When "Replace Fusing Unit Soon"
Appears on the Panel Display
A Press the {Menu}
} key.
“Menu” appears on the panel
display.
40
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 41 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Fusing Unit Type 125
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display “Maintenance”, and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display “Maint. Reset”, and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
3
Maintenance:
Maint. Reset
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display “Fusing Unit”, and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Maint. Reset
Fusing Unit
The following message appears.
Fusing Unit:
Press # to Reset
E Press the {Enter #}
} key. Wait for
a few seconds.
F Press the {On Line}
} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel
display.
41
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 42 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Intermediate Transfer Unit Type 125
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
3
A Turn off the power.
B Open the right cover of the printer.
Replace the transfer belt when the following message appears on the panel
display.
Replace Transfer
Belt soon
or
ZHBH290E
C Remove the Waste Toner Bottle.
Replace
Transfer Belt
Check the contents of the box for the
following items:
Reference
See p.32 “Waste Toner Bottle
Type 125”.
D Pull out the green levers on the
left and right that are fastening
the inner cover to unlock the levers.
❖ Transfer Belt
ZHBH510E
Important
❒ Be sure to make the setting from
the control panel after replacing
the transfer belt. Without it, the
procedure is incomplete.
42
ZHBH300E
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 43 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Intermediate Transfer Unit Type 125
E Lift the inner cover until it stays
up.
G Remove
the waste toner bottle
slowly.
3
ZHBH310E
F Unlock the waste toner bottle.
ZHBH650E
H Turn the green screws on the left
and right in the direction of the
arrows to loosen them.
ZHBH630E
Important
❒ Do not lock the waste toner bottle that has been removed. Toner may spill.
ZHBH520E
The screws are not removed.
I Pinch the both screws and remove
the transfer belt slowly until it
stops.
ZHBH640E
ZHBH530E
43
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 44 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
J Raise
the green cover, hold the
transfer belt as shown, and then
remove the transfer belt.
M Close the green cover, and then
insert it until it stops.
3
ZHBH920E
ZHBH540E
Important
❒ Be sure to hold the unit with
both hands, and then pull it out
slowly.
N Turn the green screws on the left
and right in the direction of the
arrows to tighten them.
❒ Do not touch the belt part.
K Take out the new transfer belt.
L Holding the transfer belt as
shown, insert the transfer belt in
the printer.
ZHBH580E
O Place the waste toner bottle in the
position as shown in the illustration.
ZHBH560E
ZHBH660E
44
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 45 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Intermediate Transfer Unit Type 125
P Lock the waste toner bottle.
S Close the right cover.
ZHBH670E
Important
❒ Be sure to lock the waste toner
bottle to prevent toner from
leaking inside the printer.
Q Lower the inner cover slowly.
3
ZHBH430E
T Turn on the power.
U Make the setting from the control
panel.
When "Replace Transfer Belt"
Appears on the Panel Display
A If the following message is on
the control panel, press the {Escape}
} key for more than five
seconds. The message disappears and a maintenance reset
is performed automatically.
ZHBH410E
R Push the green levers to fasten the
inner cover.
When "Replace Transfer Belt
Soon" Appears on the Panel
Display
A Press the {Menu}
} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
ZHBH420E
45
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 46 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maint. Reset", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Maintenance:
Maint. Reset
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Transfer Belt", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
3
Maint. Reset:
Transfer Belt
The following message appears.
Transfer Belt:
Press # to Reset
E Press the {Enter #}
} key.
Wait for a few seconds.
F Press the {On Line}
} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel
display.
46
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 47 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
4. Cleaning and Adjusting the
Printer
Cautions to Take When Cleaning
R WARNING:
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this
manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could
give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause
serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There
is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine
has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing unit because it could
be very hot.
Clean the printer periodically to maintain fine printing.
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not enough, wipe with a
soft, wet cloth that is wrung out well. If you still cannot remove the stain or
grime, use a neutral detergent, and then wipe over with a well-wrung wet cloth,
dry wipe, and let it dry.
Important
❒ To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine and thinner, or spray insecticide on the printer.
❒ If there is dust or grime inside the printer, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
47
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 48 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Adjusting the Color Registration
When the printer is moved, when the
Fusing Unit is replaced, or after printing repeatedly for some time, registration shifting might occur. By
performing color registration adjustment, you can maintain optimum
print results.
If the color documents show registration shifting, perform automatic color
adjustment.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
4
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Color Regist.", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
The following message appears.
Press #
To Adjust
D Press the {Enter #}} key.
Automatic color adjustment begins, and the following message is
displayed.
Adjusting...
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
Important
❒ Do not turn off the power
switch while "Adjusting..." appears on the panel display to
avoid printer malfunction.
Automatic color adjustment takes
about two minutes. When it is
complete, the following message
appears.
Completed
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
48
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 49 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Adjusting the Image Density
Adjusting the Image Density
Adjust the image density when the
print side of the page is shaded or the
print image looks patchy.
Important
❒ Extreme settings may create output that appears dirty.
❒ Image density settings should be
made from the application or the
printer driver whenever possible.
Note
❒ Changing the image density setting might cause a deterioration of
color balance. We recommend that
you leave the image density at its
factory default setting.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Image Density", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Maintenance:
Image Density
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Image Density:
Prt. Test Sheet
4
D Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on
the panel display, and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
Prt.Test Sheet:
Press # to Start
Printing
E Compare the colors on the printed
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
image density test sheet with
those on the Image Density Adjusting Card.
Note
❒ If the image density of the Image Density Adjusting Card is
equal to the framed part of the
test sheet, you do not need to
adjust the image density value.
49
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 50 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
❒ If the image density of the Image Density Adjusting Card is
equal to the density shown
above the frame, select “-” for
the image density setting. If the
image density of the Image
Density Adjusting Card is equal
to the density shown below the
frame, select “+” for the image
density setting.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the color you want to adjust, and
then press the {Enter #}
} key.
4
Image Density:
Black
G Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
image density value, and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Black:
(-10 +10)
0
Note
❒ You can adjust the image density in 21 steps from -10 to +10. Increasing the value makes the
printouts darker and decreasing
the value makes the printouts
lighter.
❒ Pressing the {U} or {T} key
makes the value increase or decrease by one.
To adjust another color, repeat the
steps F and G.
H Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
50
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 51 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Adjusting the Tray Registration
Adjusting the Tray Registration
You can adjust the registration of
Tray 2 and Tray 3 (optional Paper
Feed Unit). The vertical adjustment is
used for all trays. Normally, you need
not update the registration. But when
the optional Paper Feed Unit or the
Duplex Unit is installed, updating the
registration is useful in some cases.
The following procedure describes
how to adjust the registration of Tray
2. You can use the same procedure to
adjust the other tray as well.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
D Print the test sheet to preview the
settings.
A Confirm that "Prt. Test Sheet"
is displayed, and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
Registration:
Prt. Test Sheet
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to adjust, and
then press the {Enter #}
} key.
4
Prt. Test Sheet:
Tray 2
The test sheet is printed, and
then the printer returns to the
previous menu.
E Confirm the position of the image
on the test sheet, and then adjust
the registration value.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Registration", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Maintenance:
Registration
The following steps show how to
adjust the registration value to
make the margins equal.
51
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 52 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
A Press the {Escape}
} key.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Adjustment", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Registration:
Adjustment
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to adjust, and
then press the {Enter #}
} key.
Adjustment:
Horiz.: Tray 2
4
: Print Area
: Feed Direction
❒ Pressing the {U} or {T} key
makes the value increase or
decrease by 0.5 mm steps.
E Press the {Enter #}
} key.
F Press the {Escape}
} key.
B
F Print the test sheet to check the
settings you have made.
G Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to set
the registration value (mm).
Horiz.: Tray 2:
(-15 +15) 0
Note
❒ Increase the value to shift the
print area in the positive direction, and decrease to shift
in the negative direction.
ZDJX900J
52
A
Ready
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 53 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
5. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Control
Panel
❖ Status Messages
Messages/Second messages
Status
Calibrating…
The printer is calibrating the color. Wait until "Ready" appears
on the panel display.
Energy Save Mode
The printer is in Energy Saver (low-power) mode. No action is
required.
Hex Dump Mode
The printer receives data in hexadecimal numbers in Hex
Dump mode. Turn off the printer after printing, and then turn
it back on.
Offline
The printer is offline. Make the printer online by pressing the
{On Line}
} key to start printing.
Please Wait
The printer is initializing the development unit or HDD. Wait
for a while.
This message may appear when printing with small size paper
continuously.
Wait for a while.
Processing…
The printer is processing the print job. Wait for a while.
Ready
The default ready message. The printer is ready for use. No action is required.
Resetting Job…
The printer is resetting the print job. Wait until "Ready" appears on the panel display.
Waiting…
The printer is waiting for the next data to print. Wait for a
while.
Warming Up…
The printer is warming up and not ready. Wait until "Ready"
appears on the panel display.
❖ Alert Messages
Messages/Second messages
Add Toner:
XXX
Description
Solution
The printer is out of the indicated toner(s).
Replace with a new toner cartridge of the indicated
color(s). Even when yellow,
magenta or cyan toner runs
out, you can print in black and
white using the black toner.
XXX: Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
53
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 54 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages/Second messages
Call Service: EC
Power Off On
Cannot check
Signal in Ad hoc
Change Setting
Tray #
/Paper Size:
Paper Type:
Description
Solution
A communication error sent
Turn the power switch off and
from the engine to the control- on. If the message appears
ler.
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
The signal strength for the
wireless LAN cannot be
checked because "Ad hoc" is
selected in "Comm. Mode" for
"IEEE 802.11b" in the Host Interface menu.
Change the transmission
mode to [Infrastructure] in the
Host Interface menu.
The paper size or paper type
set in the indicated tray differs
from the setting made.
Load paper of the selected size
and type in the tray, and then
change the paper setting with
the control panel.
#: tray number
5
Or press the {Form Feed}
} key
several times until the tray
with the desired paper type
and paper size appears on the
panel display.
Or press the {Job Reset}
} key to
cancel the print job.
Close Front and/
The front or right cover of the
printer is open.
Close the front or right cover
of the printer.
Cover
The upper left cover of the
printer is open.
Close the upper left cover of
the printer.
Color Regist
Color registration has failed.
Turn the power switch off and
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
or Right Cover
Close Upper Left
Error
Error: Tray #
Form Feed
/Reset The Job
Then Power OffOn
Hardware Problem
Black PCU
54
There is a problem with the in- Press the {Form Feed}
} key to
dicated tray.
select another tray and make a
#: tray number or Bypass Tray print, or turn the power
switch off and on. If the message appears again, contact
your sales or service representative.
An error has occurred in the
black PCU (Photo Conductor
Unit).
Turn the power switch off and
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 55 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages/Second messages
Hardware Problem
Bypass Tray
Description
An error has occurred in the
Bypass Tray.
Solution
Close the Bypass Tray and
then pull out Tray 1 partially.
Slide it completely into the
printer.
If the message appears yet,
turn the power switch off and
on.
If the message appears again,
contact your sales or service
representative.
Hardware Problem
Color PCU
Hardware Problem
DIMM
Hardware Problem
Ethernet
Hardware Problem
HDD
An error has occurred in the
color PCU (Photo Conductor
Unit).
Turn the power switch off and
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
The printer detected a DIMM
sum value error.
Turn the power switch off and
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
5
The printer detected an Ether- Turn the power switch off and
net error.
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
The printer detected a HDD
Board error.
Remove and reinstall the
Printer Hard Disk correctly. If
the message appears again,
contact your sales or service
representative.
See the Option Setup Guide.
Hardware Problem
IEEE1394
The printer detected an
IEEE1394 Board error.
Remove and reinstall
IEEE1394 Board correctly.
If the message appears again,
contact your sales or service
representative.
Hardware Problem
Wireless Board
An error has occurred in the
optional 802.11b Interface
Unit or Bluetooth.
Remove and reinstall the IEEE
802.11b board or Bluetooth
board.
If the message appears again,
contact your sales or service
representative.
Hardware Problem
NV-RAM
The printer detected a Memo- Remove and reinstall the opry Switch error.
tional User Account Enhance
Unit.
If the message appears again,
contact your sales or service
representative.
55
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 56 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages/Second messages
Hardware Problem
Option RAM
Description
There is a problem with the
optional Memory Unit.
Solution
Remove and reinstall the optional Memory Unit. If the
message appears again, contact your sales or service representative.
See the Option Setup Guide.
Hardware Problem
Parallel I/F
Hardware Problem
USB
5
Invalid Password
Try Again
Load Correct
Size Paper
/Press #
To Continue
Load Paper
/Paper Size:
Paper Type
There is a problem with the
parallel interface.
If you use the parallel interface, replace the interface cable that caused the error. If the
message appears again, contact your sales or service representative.
There is a problem related to
the Universal Serial Bus Connection and Hardware.
Remove and reinstall the USB
board. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
The entered password is not
correct.
Enter the correct password.
The paper size set in the indi- Load paper of the selected size
cated tray differs from the set- in the tray, and then press the
ting made.
{Enter #}
} key to resume printing. If you want to ignore the
message and continue printing, press the {Enter #}
} key.
The paper size set in the indi- Load paper of the selected size
cated tray differs from the set- in the tray, and then change
ting made.
the paper size setting with the
control panel.
Or press the {Form Feed}
} key
several times until the tray
with the desired paper type
and paper size appears on the
panel display.
Or press the {Job Reset}
} key to
cancel the print job.
Load paper of the selected
type in the tray, and then
change the paper size setting
with the control panel.
Or press the {Form Feed}
} key
several times until the tray
with the desired paper type
and paper size appears on the
panel display.
Or press the {Job Reset}
} key to
cancel the print job.
56
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 57 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages/Second messages
Load Paper
Tray #
Description
Solution
The indicated tray is out of pa- Load paper into the indicated
per.
paper tray.
#: tray number
Menu Protected
The menu is protected.
The setting cannot be changed
for the selected menu.
There are no files available for
Sample Print job or Locked
Print job.
You can check the error files in
the error log.
There is a misfeed in the fusing unit.
Remove the misfed paper.
Cannot Change
No Files
Exist
Remove Misfeed
B: Fusing Unit
Remove Misfeed
A: Internal Path
Remove Misfeed
Y: Paper Tray
Remove Paper
Standard Tray
Replace
Black PCU
For more information, see
p.70 “When "Remove Misfeed
B: Fusing Unit" Appears”.
There is a misfeed in the print- Remove the misfed paper.
er.
For more information, see
p.69 “When "Remove Misfeed
A:Internal Path" Appears”.
5
There is a misfeed in the input Remove the misfed paper.
tray, or the printer is not feed- For more information, see
ing paper.
p.72 “When "Remove Misfeed
Y: Paper Tray" Appears”.
The standard output tray is
full.
Remove paper from the standard output tray.
It is time to replace the black
PCU (Photo Conductor Unit).
Replace the black PCU (Photo
Conductor Unit) with a new
black PCU.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Replace
Color PCU
It is time to replace the color
PCU (Photo Conductor Unit).
Replace the color PCU (Photo
Conductor Unit) with a new
color PCU.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Replace
Fusing Unit
It is time to replace the fusing
unit.
Replace the fusing unit with a
new one.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Replace Fusing
Unit Soon
Replace Transfer
Belt soon
It will be time to replace the
fusing unit soon.
Prepare a new fusing unit.
It will be time to replace the
transfer belt soon.
Prepare a new transfer belt.
57
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 58 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages/Second messages
Replace
Waste Toner
Description
Solution
It is time to replace the waste
toner bottle.
Replace the waste toner bottle
with a new waste toner bottle.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Reset PCU
Correctly
The black or color PCU is not
set correctly or is not set.
Set the black or color PCU correctly.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Reset Fusing
Unit Correctly
Reset Paper
Bypass Tray
Reset Toner
5
/Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black
Reset Tray #
Correctly
The fusing unit is not set correctly or is not set.
Set the fusing unit correctly.
There is paper left in the Bypass Tray.
Remove paper from the Bypass Tray, and then reset the
paper.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
The indicated toner carSet the indicated toner cartridge(s) is/are not set correct- tridge correctly.
ly
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
The indicated tray is not set or
is not set correctly.
#: tray number
Set the tray correctly.
Or press the {Form Feed}
} key
several times until the tray
with the desired paper setting
appears on the panel display.
Or press the {Job Reset}
} key to
cancel the print job.
Reset
Duplex Unit
Replace
Transfer Belt
The duplex unit is not set cor- Remove and reinstall the durectly or is not set.
plex unit. If the message appears again, contact your sales
or service representative. See
the Option Setup Guide.
It is time to replace the transfer belt.
Replace the transfer belt with
a new transfer belt.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
SC XXX-X
Power Off On
Toner is Almost
Empty: Black
Toner is Almost
Empty: Cyan
58
The Service Code or SC
number indicates the problem.
Turn the power switch off and
on. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
The black toner is almost emp- Prepare a new black toner carty.
tridge.
The cyan toner is almost emp- Prepare a new cyan toner carty.
tridge.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 59 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages/Second messages
Toner is Almost
Empty: Magenta
Toner is Almost
Empty: Yellow
Description
Solution
The magenta toner is almost
empty.
Prepare a new magenta toner
cartridge.
The yellow toner is almost
empty.
Prepare a new yellow toner
cartridge.
5
59
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 60 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
❖ Print Error Messages ("Error Log" in Configuration Page)
Messages/Second messages
5
60
Description
Solution
Collate Cancelled
The collate feature has been
cancelled.
Install the optional Printer
Hard Disk or increase the
memory capacity to 128MB or
more.
Driver Setting Error (Memory)
There is an error in the down- Reset the parameter for downloaded font(s).
loading fonts.
Duplex Cancelled
Duplex printing has been can- Confirm that the paper used is
celed.
supported for duplex printing. Or, increase the memory
capacity.
Exceeded Max. Pages (Collate)
The maximum number of
pages has been exceeded for
collation.
Install the optional Printer
Hard Disk or increase the
memory capacity to 128MB or
more.
Exceeded Max. Stored Files
The maximum number of files
has been exceeded during
Sample Print or Locked Print.
Delete the stored files or reduce the file size of them.
Exceeded Max. Stored Pages
The maximum number of
Reduce the number of pages
pages has been exceeded dur- to print.
ing Sample Print or Locked
Print.
HDD Full
The maximum hard disk area
size for form/font has been
exceeded.
Delete unused form/font
types.
An HDD overflow error occurred during Sample Print or
Locked Print.
Delete the stored files or reduce the file size of them.
HDD Not Installed
The Sample Print or Locked
Print feature was tried without the Printer Hard Disk installed.
To use the Sample Print or
Locked Print feature, install
the optional Printer Hard
Disk. If the message appears
again, contact your sales or
service representative.
I/O Buffer Overflow
The maximum size of the I/O
buffer has been exceeded.
Increase the size of the I/O
buffer.
Print Overrun
The image data has been
thinned out due to image
compression.
Increase the memory capacity.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 61 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages/Second messages
RPCS Graphic Error
Description
Solution
There is not enough graphics
memory to print the data.
Specify the correct memory
capacity in the [Change Accessories…] option in the RPCS
printer driver's print settings
tab. For more information, see
the printer driver's Help.
To print the image correctly,
add memory to the printer, or
reduce the resolution of the
image.
RPCS Memory Overflow
A memory overflow occurred
during the print job. After part
of the data for the page was
printed, the print job was suspended.
Specify the correct memory
capacity in the [Change Accessories…] option in the RPCS
printer driver's print settings
tab. For more information, see
the printer driver's Help.
To print the image correctly,
add memory to the printer, or
reduce the resolution of the
image.
RPCS Syntax Error
Bidirectional transmission
may not be working properly
or the RPCS printer driver settings may not be correct.
Confirm that the option settings for the printer driver
match the options actually installed on the printer.
There may not be enough
memory or the memory settings for the printer driver
may not match the memory
actually installed on the printer.
Specify the correct memory
capacity in the [Change Accessories…] option in the RPCS
printer driver's print settings
tab. For more information, see
the printer driver's Help.
5
To print the image correctly,
add memory to the printer, or
reduce the resolution of the
image.
This message may appear
Set the parallel interface mode
when the computer is conof the computer to a mode
nected to the printer with par- other than ECP.
allel interface.
61
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 62 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Printer Does Not Print
Possible Cause
Is the power on?
Solutions
Confirm that the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet
and the printer.
Turn on the power.
Does the On Line indicator
stay on?
If not, press {On Line}
} to light it.
Does the Error indicator
stay red?
If so, check the error message on the panel display and take the required action.
Is paper loaded?
Load paper into Tray 1 or on the Bypass Tray.
See p.22 “Loading Paper”.
Can you print a configura- If you cannot print a configuration page, it probably indicates a
tion page?
printer malfunction. Contact your sales or service representative.
See "Printing a Configuration Page" in the Administrator Reference.
5
Is the interface cable connected securely to the
printer and the computer?
Connect the interface cable securely. If it has a fastener, fasten it
securely as well.
Are you using the correct
interface cable?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer you use. Be sure to use the correct one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
See "Specifications" in the Administrator Reference.
62
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 63 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Printer Does Not Print
Possible Cause
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting
the print job?
Solutions
If not blinking or lit, the data is not being sent to the printer.
❖ If the printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable
Make sure the following printer port settings are correct:
• For a parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be
set.
• For a USB port connection, port USB00 (n) *1 should be set.
• For a IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) port connection, port
1394_00(n) *1 should be set.
*1
(n) is the number of printers connected.
• Windows 95/98/Me
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File]
menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
5
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.
• Windows 2000
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File]
menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.
• Windows XP
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on
the taskbar.
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File]
menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port(s).] box to confirm
that the correct port is selected.
• Windows NT 4.0
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File]
menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.
63
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 64 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
When you use 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
Solutions
❖ Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
A Confirm that 1394 Interface Unit Type4510 is attached to the
computer correctly.
B Confirm that IEEE1394 interface cable is connected securely.
C Restart the computer.
If the error occurs even after executing above operation, go to
the following steps.
D Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable which is connected to the
printer.
E Execute the utility tool for 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 which
is stored in the following path in the CD-ROM labeled "Printer
Drivers and Utilities".
UTILITY\1394
Important
5
❒ For more information about using the utility tool for IEEE
1394, see the README file in the same directory in the CDROM.
64
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 65 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Other Printing Problems
Other Printing Problems
Status
Toner smears appear on the
print side of the page.
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
When “Replace PCU” appears on the panel display, replace
the photo conductor unit.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Set the image density lighter with the control panel in the
"Maintenance" menu.
See p.47 “Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer”.
Confirm that the paper is not curled or bent. Envelopes can
be curled easily. Flatten paper before loading.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper gets wrinkles.
Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is too thin.
5
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
The fusing unit is deteriorated or damaged. Replace the unit.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
The color of the printout is different from the color specified.
If a specific color is missing, turn the power switch off and
on. If this does not solve the problem, contact your sales or
service representative.
Color changes extremely when
adjusted with the printer driver.
Do not extreme settings for the color balance under the [Print
Quality] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.
Photo images are coarse.
Some applications lower the resolution for making prints.
Black gradation is not natural.
Select "CMY+K" for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer driver's
dialog box.
See the printer driver's Help.
See the printer driver's Help.
Color documents are printed in
black and white.
The printer driver is not set up for color printing.
Fine dot pattern does not print.
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's dialog
box.
See the printer driver's Help.
Some applications print color files in black and white.
See the printer driver's Help.
Images are cut off, or excess
pages are printed.
If you are using paper smaller than the paper size selected in
the application, use the same size paper as that selected in the
application. If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use
the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print.
See the printer driver's Help.
65
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 66 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Status
It takes too much time to complete the print job.
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time
for the printer to process, so simply wait when printing such
data.
Changing the settings with printer driver may help to speed
up printing.
See the printer driver's Help.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process
it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data is being processed. Just wait until it resumes.
If "Warming Up..." appears on the panel display, the printer
is now warming up. Wait for a while.
It takes too much time to resume
printing.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process
it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data is being processed. Just wait until it resumes.
The printer was in the Energy Saver mode. To resume from
the Energy Saver mode, the printer has to warm up, and this
takes time until printing starts. To disable the Energy Saver
mode, select "Off" for "Energy Saver" in the System Settings
menu.
5
Multiple pages are fed at once.
Number of paper set in the tray exceeds the limit. Confirm
that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is static. Use paper that has been stored properly.
When loading paper, separate paper from each other.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is either too thick or too thin.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is not fed from the select- When using the Bypass Tray, confirm that the paper size and
ed tray.
the feed direction on the tray are the same as the ones set
with the control panel.
See p.24 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”.
When you are using a Windows operating system, the printer driver settings override those set using the control panel.
Set the desired input tray using the printer driver.
See the printer driver's Help.
66
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 67 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Other Printing Problems
Status
Paper jams occur frequently.
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The paper guide in the paper tray is not locked. Lock the paper guide.
See p.22 “Loading Paper”.
The paper size and feed direction loaded on the Bypass Tray
are different from them set with the control panel. Either
change the setting or load paper to meet the setting.
See p.24 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”.
The end guide in the paper tray is not set correctly. Set the
end guide correctly.
See p.22 “Loading Paper”.
Number of paper set in the tray exceeds the limit. Confirm
that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray.
See p.22 “Loading Paper”.
Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
5
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is either too thick or too thin.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper is bent or wrinkled. Use paper that have no bents or
wrinkles.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
Paper has already been printed on.
See p.15 “Paper and Other Media”.
The fusing unit is deteriorated or damaged. Replace them.
See p.29 “Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit”.
Solid areas, lines or text are
Select "K(black)" for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer driver's
shiny or glossy when created as dialog box.
a mixture of cyan, magenta, yel- See the printer driver's Help.
low.
Solid lines are printed as broken
lines.
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's dialog
box.
See the printer driver's Help.
The color of the printout is different from the color on the
computer's display.
The colors made using color toner are different from colors
displayed on the display in its production system.
See "Appendix" in the Client Reference.
When [Toner Saving] is checked under the [Print Quality] tab in
the printer driver's dialog box, the color gradation may appear differently.
See the printer driver's Help.
Images are printed in the wrong
orientation.
The feed direction you selected and the feed direction selected in Option Setup of the printer driver might not be the
same. Make the proper settings.
67
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 68 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
Status
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
An error message on the control
panel stays on after removing
the misfed paper.
Open the front cover of the printer, and then close it.
A print image is not clear.
Due to a sudden change in temperature, condensation might
appear inside the printer, reducing print quality. If this occurs when you move the printer from a cold room to a warmer room, do not use the printer until it acclimatizes to the
temperature.
The print side of the page is a
hazy gray.
Adjust the image density.
}, and select Image
To adjust the image density, press {Menu}
Density from the “Maintenance” menu.
See p.49 “Adjusting the Image Density”.
If paper is curled, flatten it.
Curled or folded paper might cause a hazy gray print. Curling often occurs on envelopes, so be sure to flatten it before
printing.
5
A printed image is different
from the image on the computer's display.
When you use some functions, such as enlargement and reduction, the layout of the image might be different from that
displayed in the computer display.
You might have selected to replace True Type fonts with
printer fonts in the printing process.
To print an image similar to the image on the computer,
make the settings to print out True Type fonts as an image.
See the printer driver's Help.
Note
❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
68
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 69 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
Removing Misfed Paper
When a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears on the panel display. Remove the misfed paper from
the location indicated.
Important
❒ Toner dust may be on the misfed
paper after removal. Be careful not
to get it on your hands or clothes.
❒ Toner dust may be on the paper
printed after removing misfed paper. Make a few prints until smears
do not appear any more.
❒ Forcefully removing misfed paper
may cause paper to tear and leave
scraps of paper in the printer. This
might cause a misfeed and damage
the printer.
Note
❒ Close the Bypass Tray if it is extended. If the Bypass Tray is extended, the front cover does not
open.
B If you see the misfed paper, slowly pull it out.
5
ZHBH120E
If you cannot remove paper easily,
do not forcefully pull it, but go to
next step.
When "Remove Misfeed
A:Internal Path" Appears
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
C Pull part "A" in the direction of
the arrow, and then open the cover.
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
A
ZHBH070E
ZHBP281E
69
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 70 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
D Remove the misfed paper.
When "Remove Misfeed B:
Fusing Unit" Appears
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
ZHBH080E
A Open the front cover by pushing
E Close the cover.
the front cover release button.
5
A
ZHBH090E
ZHBP281E
F Close the front cover slowly.
Note
❒ Close the Bypass Tray if it is extended. If the Bypass Tray is extended, the front cover does not
open.
B Pull out levers "B1" on the left and
right.
ZHBP282E
ZHBH110E
70
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 71 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
C Remove the misfed paper.
F Return the guide board.
ZHBH120E
If you cannot remove the paper
easily, do not forcefully pull it, but
go to the next step.
ZHBH130E
G Return levers "B1" on the left and
right.
D Pull
part "B2" toward the front,
and then open the guide board.
5
ZHBH930E
H Close the front cover slowly.
ZHBH130E
E Remove the misfed paper.
ZHBP282E
ZHBH140E
71
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 72 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
C Slide
the paper tray completely
into the printer.
When "Remove Misfeed Y:
Paper Tray" Appears
A Pull out the tray.
ZHBH160E
ZHBH940E
5
Important
❒ When pulling it out, be careful not
to pull it strongly. If you do, the
tray might fall and cause an injury.
B Remove the misfed paper.
Important
❒ Be sure to insert the paper tray
completely. Otherwise, misfeeds might occur.
D Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button,
and then close it to reset the misfeed condition.
❖ Tray 1
ZHBH170E
ZHBH760E
❖ Tray 2/3
ZHBH770E
72
Note
❒ You can apply this procedure
for both the paper tray and the
optional Paper Feed Unit.
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 73 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
C Remove the misfed paper.
When "Remove Misfeed Z:
Duplex Unit" Appears
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
ZHBH190E
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
D Close the front cover slowly.
5
ZHBP282E
ZHBP281E
Note
❒ Close the Bypass Tray if it is extended. If the Bypass Tray is extended, the front cover does not
open.
B Pull lever "PULL" of the Duplex
Unit A, and then pull up the Duplex Unit until it stops B.
ZHBH180E
73
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 74 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Troubleshooting
5
74
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 75 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
6. Appendix
Moving and Transporting the Printer
R CAUTION:
• When moving the machine, each person should hold the handles that are
located on opposite sides, and then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
• When you move the printer, remember to unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid a fire or an electric shock.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug, not the cord, to
avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
• When moving the printer after use, do not take out any of the Toners, Photo
Conductor Units, nor the Waste Toner Bottle to prevent toner spill inside the
machine.
Repack the printer in its original packing materials for transporting.
Note
❒ The printer weighs approximately 29.4 kg (64.8 lb.).
Important
❒ Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
❒ The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment.
❒ If the optional Paper Feed Unit is installed, remove it from the printer, and
then move them separately.
75
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 76 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
Appendix
Moving the Printer
R CAUTION:
• When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the
printer could break or cause an injury if dropped.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If
the cord is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs
or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
Moving the printer in a short distance
A Be sure to check the following points:
• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cable is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• The interface cable is unplugged from the printer.
B If the external options are installed, remove them.
See the Option Setup Guide and follow the steps backwards for removing options.
6
C Lift the printer with two people by using the inset grips on both side of the
printer, and then move it horizontally to the place where you want to install
it.
D If you removed options in step B, reinstall them.
Note
❒ See the Option Setup Guide for installing options.
Important
❒ Be sure to move the printer horizontally. To prevent toner from scattering,
move the printer slowly.
❒ If the optional Paper Feed Unit is installed, remove it from the printer, and
then move them separately.
76
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 77 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
INDEX
A
Adjusting the Color Registration, 48
Adjusting the Image Density, 49
Adjusting the Tray Registration, 51
Appendix, 75
B
Bypass Tray, 10
C
Caution, 2
Clearing and Adjusting the Printer, 47
Controller Board, 11, 12
Control Panel, 10, 14
D
Data In Indicator, 14
Data In indicator, 63
Display panel, messages, 53
Duplex Unit, 13
E
Energy Star, 6
Enter # Key, 14
Envelopes, 20
Error, 53
Error Indicator, 14
Error indicator, 62
Escape Key, 14
Ethernet Port, 12
F
Form Feed Key, 14
Front Cover, 10
Fusing Unit, 13, 38
G
Glossy Paper, 19
Guide to the Printer
Control Panel, 14
Exterior -Front View, 10
Exterior -Rear View, 11, 12
Inside, 13
I
Input Paper Sizes, 15
J
Job Reset Key, 14
L
Loading Paper, 18
Bypass Tray, 24
Optional Paper Feed Unit, 22
paper size, 23
paper type, 23
Tray 1, 22
M
Menu Key, 14
messages, 53
Moving the Printer, 76
O
OHP transparencies, 19
Online indicator, 62
On Line Key, 14
Online key, 62
Other Printing Problems, 65
P
Panel Display, 14
Paper Feed Unit Connector, 11, 12
Paper not supported by this printer, 20
Paper Recommendations, 18
Paper Size, 15
Paper weight and number of sheets to be set, 17
Parallel Port, 11, 12
Photo Conductor Unit, 13, 34
Plain Paper, 18
Power Indicator, 14
Power Port, 11, 12
Power Switch, 11, 12
Print Area, 21
Printer Does Not Print, 62
77
AresPGBMaintGuide-F_FM.book Page 78 Friday, July 26, 2002 5:17 PM
R
Remove Misfed Paper
Duplex Unit, 73
Fusing Unit, 70
Internal Path, 69
Paper Tray, 72
Removing Misfed Paper, 69
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance
Kit, 29
Right Cover, 11, 12
S
Standard Tray, 10
Standard Tray Extension, 11, 12
Storing Paper, 18
T
Thick Paper, 19
Toner Cartridge, 13, 29
Transfer Belt, 13
Transfer Roller, 13
Transfer Unit, 42
Tray 1, 10
Troubleshooting, 53
U
Upper Left Cover, 10
USB Port, 11, 12
V
Ventilator, 10, 11, 12
W
Warning, 2
Waste Toner Bottle, 13, 32
78
EE
GB
G081
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read “Safety Information” in this manual before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.”
Power Source
220-240V, 50/60 Hz, 4A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This printer is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The printer contains 7 milliwat, 645 - 660 nanometer wavelength, AlGaInP Laser Diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact
with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms
have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
The following label is attached on the back of the printer.
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
802.11b Interface Unit TypeA(R-WL11):
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications
terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Laser Safety:
The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment.
The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is
not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This
printer contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Copyright © 2002
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio CL3000, CL3000DN
Printed in The Netherlands
EE
GB
G081-6570
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
Operating Instructions
Maintenance Guide
Getting Started
Paper and Other Media
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Troubleshooting
Appendix
For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
PostScript 3 Supplement
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................3
1. Using PostScript 3
Setting up Options ................................................................................................................................5
Job Type............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Collate.............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Duplex Printing................................................................................................................................................ 14
Color Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Paper Selection ................................................................................................................................................ 17
Paper Size ........................................................................................................................................................ 18
Media Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 19
Paper source..................................................................................................................................................... 20
Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
Gradation ......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Color Profile .................................................................................................................................................... 22
Color Setting .................................................................................................................................................... 24
Dithering .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Gray Reproduction........................................................................................................................................... 27
Black Over Print .............................................................................................................................................. 28
Toner Saving.................................................................................................................................................... 29
Color Control ................................................................................................................................................... 29
User Code ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
Options............................................................................................................................................................. 31
1
2
2. Printer Utility for Mac
Installing Printer Utility for Mac ......................................................................................................33
Starting Printer Utility for Mac ........................................................................................................34
Printer Utility for Mac Functions .....................................................................................................35
Downloading PS Fonts .................................................................................................................................... 36
Displaying Printer's Fonts................................................................................................................................ 38
Deleting Fonts.................................................................................................................................................. 38
Initializing the Printer Disk ............................................................................................................................. 39
Page Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 40
Printing Font Catalog....................................................................................................................................... 40
Printing Font Sample ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Renaming the Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Restarting the Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 42
Downloading PostScript Files ......................................................................................................................... 42
Selecting the Zone ........................................................................................................................................... 43
Displaying the Printer Status ........................................................................................................................... 44
Launching the Dialogue Console..................................................................................................................... 44
INDEX ................................................................................................................................... 46
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the printer.
Please read the Safety Information before using this printer. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be
liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Appletalk, Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS, Mac OS X is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
3
4
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Notes:
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
1. Using PostScript 3
5
Setting up Options
This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are added by installing the
PPD file. For more information about the functions and menus of the Windows 95/98/Me PostScript
printer driver, see the printer driver's Help.
Preparation
On a Macintosh, Mac OS 8.6 or later (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.) or Mac OS X
10.1 or later is required.
Limitation
❒ If you use Mac OS X, the following functions cannot be used:
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• User Code
Job Type
Use this to select the type of print job.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/ 98/ Me
[Job Type] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Job Type] on the [Job Log] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4. 0
[Job Type] on the [Job Log] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Job Type] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
This function is not available.
You can select the following items:
6
❖ Normal
Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print command is given.
Note
❒ Under Windows 95/98/Me, if you want to use an User ID, click the [Detail] button.
❖ Sample Print
Use this function to print only one set of a multiple print jobs.
The other sets are saved in the machine. The saved job can be printed from the machine's control
panel. You can also delete the saved job.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, the optional Hard Disk Drive must be installed on the printer.
Note
❒ The "User ID" can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters.
❒ Entering the "User ID" helps you to distinguish the print job from others.
Reference
For more information about how to use Sample Print, see p.7 “How to Use Sample Print”.
❖ Locked Print
Use this function to save documents in the machine memory with a password, and then edit and print
them as you want.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, the optional Hard Disk Drive must be installed on the printer.
Note
❒ The "User ID" can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. The "Password"
must be four digits.
7
Reference
For more information about how to use Locked Print, see p.10 “How to Use Locked Print”.
How to Use Sample Print
Follow the procedures to print a document using the "Sample Print" function.
Note
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
Windows 95/98/Me
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties to set Sample Print.
C Click to select the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in [Job Type].
E Click [Details...].
F Enter the "User ID" in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9)
characters.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.
8
G Click [OK].
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties to set Sample Print.
C Click to select the [Job Log] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in [Print Job].
E Enter the "User ID" in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9)
characters.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.
F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
The Sample Print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.
H Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, see "Printing the Remaining Sets" in the Client Reference.
If not, you can delete the saved job. See "Deleting a Sample Print File" in the Client Reference.
9
Mac OS
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Click to select [Job Log] from the pop up menu.
C Select [Sample Print] in [Job Type], and then select the appropriate setting.
D Enter the “User ID” in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
characters.
Note
❒ This is used to identify the user associated with a job.
❒ The "User ID" can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E After making all of the settings you want, click [Print].
The Sample Print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.
F Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, see "Printing the Remaining Sets" in the Client Reference.
If not, you can delete the saved job. See "Deleting a Sample Print File" in the Client Reference.
10
How to Use Locked Print
Follow the procedures to print a document using the "Locked Print" function.
Note
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
Windows 95/98/Me
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties to set Locked Print.
C Click to select the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Locked Print] in [Job Type].
E Click [Details...].
F Enter the "User ID" in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
characters. Then enter a password in [Password], up to four digits.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.
G Click [OK].
11
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties to set Locked Print.
C Click to select the [Job Log] tab.
D Select [Locked Print] in [Print Job].
E Enter the "User ID" in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
characters. Then enter a password in [Password], up to four digits.
Note
❒ Use this to identify the user associated with the job.
F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
The Locked Print job is sent to the machine.
12
Mac OS
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B Click to select [Job Log] from the pop up menu.
C Select [Locked Print] in [Job Type], and then select the appropriate setting.
D Enter the “User ID” in [User ID]. This can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
characters. Then enter a password in [Password], up to four digits.
Note
❒ This is used to identify the user associated with a job.
13
Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the printer can efficiently print collated sets of
multiple-page documents.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, a Memory Unit of at least 128MB or Hard Disk Drive must be installed on the
printer.
❒ If you use Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS or Mac OS X, make sure that the following check
boxes have not been selected.
• Windows 2000, Windows XP
The [Collated] check box on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/ Quality] tab in the
Printing Preferences dialog box.
• Mac OS
The [Collate] check box in the print dialog box.
• Mac OS X
The [Collate] check box on [Copies & Pages] in the printer dialog box.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Collate] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Collate] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Collate] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Collate:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Collate] on the [Feture 1] tab on [Printer Feature] in the printer dialog box.
14
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, the optional Duplex Unit must be installed on the printer.
❒ You cannot perform duplex printing from the Bypass Tray.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Duplex] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Print on Both Sides (Duplex)] on the [Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)] on the [Page Setup] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
The [Print on both Sides] check box on [Duplex] in the print dialog box.
You can select the following items: The following items may vary depending on the operating system
you are using.
Windows 95/98/Me
❖ Off
Disables Duplex Printing.
❖ Open to Left
Prints output so that you can open it to the left.
15
❖ Open to Top
Prints output so that you can open it to the top.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS, Mac OS X
Note
❒ If you use a Macintosh, click to select the button that means [Flip on Long Edge] or [Flip on Short Edge].
❖ None
Disables Duplex Printing.
❖ Flip on Short Edge
Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.
❖ Flip on Long Edge
Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.
Windows NT 4.0
❖ None
Disables Duplex Printing.
❖ Short Side
Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.
❖ Long Side
Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.
16
Color Mode
Use this to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Color Mode] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Color Mode] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Mode] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Color Mode:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Mode] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
Note
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, this mode is called "Color/Black and White".
You can select the following items:
❖ Color
Prints color documents in full color.
Note
❒ Color images will be printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black. CMYK are
three primary subtractive colors.
❒ If you want to adjust the print color, adjust the settings in the Advanced dialog box accessed from
the Advanced button on the [Print Quality] tab.
17
❖ Black and White
Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and White printing is faster
than Color printing. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [Black
and White] in the printer driver as well as in the application.
Paper Selection
Paper Sources and Output Tray Tabs
Use this to select the media type, input tray, and output tray.
Limitation
❒ This function is for Windows 95/98/Me only.
Reference
For more information about the [Paper Sources and Output Tray] tabs. See the printer driver's Help.
18
Paper Size
Use this to select the size of paper you want to use.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Size:] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preference dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Paper Size:] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document Defaults dialog
box.
Mac OS
[Paper:] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the Page Setup dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Size:] in the Page Setup dialog box.
Reference
For more information about the paper sizes supported by this printer, see "Paper and Other Media
Supported by This Printer" in the Maintenance Guide.
19
Media Type
Use this to select the paper type.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Type:] on [All Pages] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Media:] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preference dialog
box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Paper/Output] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog
box.
Mac OS
[Paper Type:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Type] on the [Features 3] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
Reference
For more information about the media type supported by this printer, see "Types of Paper and Other
Media" in the Maintenance Guide.
20
Paper source
Use this to select the paper sources.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[All Pages] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
The [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
The [Page Setup] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Paper Source:] on [General] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Paper Feed] in the print dialog box.
Resolution
Use this to set the resolution to [600dpi] or [1200dpi].
Limitation
❒ When the resolution option is set to [1200dpi], the gradation option must be set to [Fast].
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Graphic] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in
the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Graphic] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab
in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Resolution] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features]
in the print dialog box.
21
Gradation
Use this to select a type of gradation based on your purpose.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Gradation] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Gradation] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Gradation:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Gradation] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
You can select the following items:
❖ Standard
Prints with good quality of gradation.
❖ Fast
Prints quickly while gradation loses some smoothness.
22
Color Profile
Use this to select the color profile pattern.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
The [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Color Profile] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Profile] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Color Profile:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Profile] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
You can select the following items:
Important
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Profile] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual]
from the[Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to "Auto".
❖ Auto
Use this setting to configure the best color profile pattern automatically depending on the appearance of the document to be printed.
❖ Photographic
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones.
23
❖ Presentation
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text and graphics. This CRD
is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for
printing photographs, the color or gradations might not be reproduced well.
❖ Solid Color
Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on.
❖ User Setting
Use this setting to print images with downloaded CRD from your application.
Note
❒ Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you
should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for "Color Setting". The following items are available:
[Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation] and [Solid Color].
24
Color Setting
Use this to select the correction method used for color conversion.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Color Setting] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Color Setting] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Color Setting:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Color Setting] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
Important
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Setting] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual]
from the [Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to "Super Fine".
Note
❒ The color rendering dictionary that is selected in the "Color Profile" setting is used.
You can select the following items:
❖ Off
No modification to the color setting.
25
❖ Fine
Select this setting to perform color matching based on one of the printer's built- in color rendering
dictionaries and perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs the printing which output target
is Monitor γ = 1.8.
❖ Super Fine
Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary as in the "Fine" setting but produce output that
is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize light colors. This setting performs the printing which
output target is Monitor γ = 2.2.
Note
❒ Use this to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you
should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for "Color Setting". The following items are available:
[Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation] and [Solid Color].
26
Dithering
Use this to set the Image Rendering mode.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Dithering] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Dithering] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Dithering] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Dithering] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
Important
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Dithering] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from
[Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to "Auto".
You can select the following items:
❖ Auto
Use this setting to configure the best dithering method automatically depending on the appearance
of the document to be printed.
❖ Photographic
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for photographs.
❖ Text
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for text.
27
❖ User Setting
Use this setting to print images set in half tone in your application.
Gray Reproduction
Use this to select the Black Color mode for text and line art.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Black Text/ Graphics] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in
the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Black Text/ Graphics] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab
in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Black Text/Graphics] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.
Mac OS X
[Black Text/Graphics] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in
the print dialog box.
Important
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Gray Reproduction] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to "Pure Black Text".
Note
❒ If you use Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Mac OS or Mac OS X, this function is
called "Black Text/Graphics".
You can select the following items:
28
❖ Pure Black Text
Select this setting to use a black toner.
Note
❒ If you use Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Mac OS or Mac OS X, this mode is
called "K".
❖ CMY+K
Select this setting to use all toners.
Black Over Print
Select whether or not to apply a black color over any other colors when printing.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Black Over Print] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the
Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Black Over Print] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Black Over Print:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Black Over Print] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the
print dialog box.
Important
❒ If you use Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Black Over Print] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual]
from the [Color] setting.
29
Toner Saving
Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Toner Saving] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Toner Saver] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
[Toner Saver] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the
Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Toner Saver:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
[Toner Saver] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
Color Control
Use this to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing so
that the printed page matches closer to the colors on the screen.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
The [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Graphic] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0
This function is not available.
Mac OS
[Print Color] on the [Color Matching] tab in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
This function is not available.
30
Note
❒ If you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP, this function is called "Image Color Management".
❒ If you use Windows NT 4.0, this function can not be configured.
❒ If you use Mac OS, this function is called "Color Matching".
❖ Image Color Control
Display the Image Color Matching dialog box, click this button to specify exactly how you want the
colors on your screen adjusted before printing.
User Code
Use this to set a user code for print logging.
Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users and allows you to
check the number of sheets printed under each code with SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[User Code] on the [Statistics] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[User Code] on the [Job Log] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog
box.
Windows NT 4.0
[User Code] on the [Job Log] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[User Code] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X
This function is not available.
Reference
For more information about using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see Help.
31
Options
See “Setting Up Options” in the Client Reference or the Administrator Reference for the installation
method appropriate to your printing environment.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me
[Option] on the [Accessories] tab.
Windows 2000, Windows XP
[Installable Options] on the [Device Setting] tab.
Windows NT 4.0
[Installable Options] on the [Device Setting] tab in the Document Defaults dialog box.
Mac OS
[Chooser] on the Apple Menu.
Mac OS X
This function is not available.
❖ Tray 2
• You can select the tray with the following menu for PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000:
Paper Source⇒ p.20
❖ Tray 3
• You can select the other tray with the following menu for an additional PAPER FEED UNIT
Type 3000:
Paper Source⇒ p.20
Note
❒ If you use Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Mac OS or Mac OS X, this menu
is called "Tray 2 and 3".
32
❖ Duplex Unit
• You can use the following function with AD440:
Duplex Printing⇒ p.14
❖ Hard Disk
• You can use the following function with Printer Hard Disk Type 3000:
Collate⇒ p.13
Note
❒ This function is for Windows 95/98/Me only.
❖ Total Memory
• You can use the following function with Memory Unit Type C (64/128/256 MB):
Collate⇒ p.13
Note
❒ The optional Memory Unit of at least 128MB must be installed on the printer.
❒ This function is for Windows 95/98/Me only.
2. Printer Utility for Mac
By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of the printer and so on.
Limitation
❒ If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.
Note
❒ Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
❒ Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 8.1 or later. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
❒ Printer Utility for Mac cannot use Mac OS X (native mode).
Installing Printer Utility for Mac
Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.
A Start the Macintosh.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM icon appears.
C Double-click the icon of hard disk to open it.
D Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
E Double-click the [Mac OS] folder.
F Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM, and then drag the [Printer Utility for Mac]
file, and then drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.
G Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
33
34
Starting Printer Utility for Mac
The following instructions describe how to start Printer Utility for Mac.
Important
❒ Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, confirm that the printer is selected with [Chooser] on the Apple
menu.
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.
The Printer Utility for Mac dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Reference
For more information, see “Printer Utility for Mac Functions”.
35
Printer Utility for Mac Functions
Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below.
❖ File menu
• [Download PS Fonts...]
Download fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the printer. See p.36 “Downloading PS Fonts”.
• [Display Printer's Fonts...]
Display and delete the fonts in printer memory and the printer's hard disk drive. See p.38 “Displaying Printer's Fonts”.
• [Initialize Printer's Disk...]
Initialize the printer's hard disk drive. See p.39 “Initializing the Printer Disk”.
• [Page Setup...]
Set up the paper size to print “Printer Font Catalog” and “Printer Font Sample”. See p.40 “Page
Setup”.
• [Print Font Catalog...]
Print the names of available fonts. See p.40 “Printing Font Catalog”.
• [Print Font Sample...]
Print a sample of fonts. See p.40 “Printing Font Sample”.
• [Rename Printer...]
Change the printer's name when viewed via Appletalk. See p.41 “Renaming the Printer”.
• [Restart Printer]
Restart the printer. See p.42 “Restarting the Printer”.
36
❖ Utility menu
• [Download PostScript File...]
Download a PostScript File. See p.42 “Downloading PostScript Files”.
• [Select Zone...]
Change the zone to which the printer belongs to via Appletalk. See p.43 “Selecting the Zone”.
• [Display Printer Status...]
Display the status of the printer. See p.44 “Displaying the Printer Status”.
• [Launch Dialogue Console...]
Create and edit a PostScript file, and then download it to the printer. See p.44 “Launching the
Dialogue Console”.
Downloading PS Fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the printer's memory or hard disk drive.
Important
❒ The following procedures to download the fonts assume that you are a system administrator. If you
are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.
❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
❒ Confirm that a Macintosh and the printer are connected with Appletalk.
Note
❒ Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
❒ Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use.
A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.
37
B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
C Click to select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
Important
❒ During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or open or close the
cover.
F When the completion message appears, click [OK].
G Click [Cancel].
38
Displaying Printer's Fonts
You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts in the printer's memory
and hard disk drive can be displayed.
Note
❒ The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.
A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].
C Click [OK].
Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the printer's memory or hard disk drive.
A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].
C Select the fonts you want to delete.
Limitation
❒ You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.
D Click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
39
E Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you want to delete the
fonts.
F Click [Continue], and then click [OK].
G Click [OK].
Initializing the Printer Disk
When initializing the printer's hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the printer's hard disk drive are
deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard disk drive.
Important
❒ When initializing the printer's hard disk drive from the operation panel, all of the data on the printer's
hard disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the data on the hard disk drive.
A Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.
The confirmation message appears.
Note
❒ To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].
B Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
Important
❒ Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the hard disk drive might
be damaged.
C When the completion message appears, click [OK].
40
Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Prints Fonts Sample”.
A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.
B Choose the paper size.
Printing Font Catalog
Print the names of fonts available on the printer.
Note
❒ The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.
B Click [Print].
Printing Font Sample
You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.
Note
❒ Print by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.
B Click [Print].
41
Renaming the Printer
You can change the printer's name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers on the
network, assign different names so you can identify them. If several printers have the same name, a digit
appears next to the printer name in [Chooser].
A Select [Rename Printer...] on the [File] menu.
B Type a new name in the [New Name:] field.
Limitation
❒ You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
❒ Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”,”@”, “~”.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Click to select the printer name renamed in step B, and then close [Chooser].
Note
❒ If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone to which the printer belongs to.
42
Restarting the Printer
You can restart the printer.
A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.
B Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The printer restarts.
Note
❒ The fonts that you downloaded in the printer's memory will be deleted.
❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to their defaults.
Downloading PostScript Files
You can download a Postscript file to the printer.
A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.
B Select the file name to download and click the file name, and then click [Open].
C Type the log file name, and then click [Save].
The selected file is downloaded.
Note
❒ Errors are recorded in the log file.
43
Selecting the Zone
You can change the zone to which the printer belongs to via Appletalk.
Important
❒ Confirm that the printer and a Macintosh are connected in an Appletalk environment.
A Select [Select Zone...] on the [Utility] menu.
The zone to which the printer belongs to and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone to which you want to switch the printer, and then click [Change].
A confirmation message appears.
C Click [Continue].
A confirmation message appears.
D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Select the zone selected in step B on the [Appletalk zone:] list.
H Click to select the printer you want to use on the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list.
I Close [Chooser].
44
Displaying the Printer Status
You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.
A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.
The current status of the printer appears.
B Confirm the current status of the printer.
You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the hard disk drive status
and available space on the hard disk drive. You can also confirm the zone to which the printer belongs to.
C Click [OK].
Launching the Dialogue Console
You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer.
Important
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript.
❒ Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.
A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.
Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
45
B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.
Note
❒ To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
❒ You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console] menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the printer.
Note
❒ The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.
D Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.
INDEX
B
Black Over Print, 28
C
Collate, 13
Color Control, 29
Color Mode, 16
Color Profile, 22
Color Setting, 24
D
Deleting Fonts, 38
Displaying Printer's Fonts, 38
Displaying the Printer Status, 44
Dithering, 26
Downloading PostScript Files, 42
Downloading PS Fonts, 36
Duplex Printing, 14
F
Functions
Printer Utility for Mac, 35
G
Gradation, 21
Gray Reproduction, 27
46
I
Initializing Printer Disk, 39
Installing, 33
Printer Utility for Mac, 33
J
Job Type, 5
L
Launching the Dialogue Console, 44
M
Media Type, 19
O
Options, 31
P
Page Setup, 40
Paper Selection, 17
Paper Size, 18
Paper source, 20
Printer Utility for Mac, 33
Functions, 35
Printing Font Catalog, 40
Printing Font Sample, 40
47
R
Renaming the Printer, 41
Resolution, 20
Restarting the Printer, 42
S
Selecting the Zone, 43
Setting up Options, 5
T
Toner Saving, 29
U
User Code, 30
48
Copyright © 2002
49
EE GB
UE USA G081-6630
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=44 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Option Setup Guide
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio CL3000, CL3000DN
Printed in The Netherlands
EE
GB
G081-6530
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Option Setup Guide Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=44 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm
ZPIntroduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This
printer contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good copy quality, supplier recommends that you use genuine supplier's toner.
Supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine supplier's office product.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
•
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95.
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2002
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page i Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
1. Options
Available Options...................................................................................................3
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000 ..............................................................................8
AD440 (Duplex Unit) ............................................................................................ 11
Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM Module) .............................................................. 13
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000 ............................................................................... 16
Formatting the Printer Hard Disk drive ..................................................................... 18
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510............................................................................. 19
Connecting the cable to the 1394 Interface Unit ...................................................... 22
IEEE 1394 Configuration.......................................................................................... 22
802.11b Interface Unit Type A............................................................................. 25
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Configuration ........................................................... 28
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type A ......................................................................... 32
Network Interface Board Type 3000 ................................................................... 35
Connecting the Network Interface Cable to the Network ......................................... 37
User Account Enhance Unit Type B................................................................... 38
INDEX......................................................................................................... 41
i
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page ii Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
ii
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 1 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, or data might be lost.
Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
1
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 2 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
2
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 3 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
1. Options
Available Options
R CAUTION:
• Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged
for at least an hour. Components inside the machine become very hot, and
can cause a burn if touched.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cable from the outlet. If the
cable is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or
cables can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
• When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could
break or cause an injury if dropped.
By installing options, you can improve the printer performance and have an expanded variety of features to use. For the specifications of each option, see the
Administrator Reference.
❖ Option List
Basic model Printer
PAPER FEED UNIT Type
3000
❍
AD440 (Duplex Unit)
❍
Memory Unit Type C
❍
Network standard model
Printer
❍
❍
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
❍
❍
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
❍ *1
❍ *2
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
❍ *1
❍ *2
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type
A
❍ *1
❍ *2
Network Interface Board
Type 3000
❍ *1
User Account Enhance Unit
Type B
❍
❍
❍: Available option
*1
*2
With Basic model, these cannot be installed at the same time
With Network standard model, these cannot be attached at the same time.
When installing multiple options on the printer, we recommend the following
order of installation.
Important
❒ The voltage rating of the connector for options is 24V DC or less.
3
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 4 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
❖ Option Installation Flow Chart
A
Attach the Paper Feed Unit to the bottom of the printer.
Attach the Paper Feed Unit.
You can attach up to two Paper Feed Units.
(PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000)
1
T
B
Install the unit to the back of the front cover.
Install the Duplex Unit.
(AD440)
T
C
Install the SDRAM Module.
Install the module to the SDRAM module slot on the controller board.
(Memory Unit Type C)
64MB, 128MB, and 256MB Memory Units are available.
T
D
Install the Printer Hard Disk to the controller board.
Install the Printer Hard Disk.
(Printer Hard Disk Type 3000)
T
E
Install the 1394 Interface Unit.
(1394 Interface Unit Type 4510)
Install the 1394 Interface Unit to the slot on the controller
board.
If you choose to install the 1394 Interface Unit, remove the
USB2.0 Interface Board and you cannot install the 802.11b
Interface Unit or Bluetooth Interface Unit.
T
F
Install the 802.11b Interface Unit
(802.11b Interface Unit Type A)
Install the 802.11b Interface Unit to the slot on the controller
board.
If you choose to install the 802.11b Interface Unit, remove
the USB2.0 Interface Board and you cannot install the 1394
Interface Unit or Bluetooth Interface Unit.
T
G
Install the Bluetooth Interface
Unit
(Bluetooth Interface Unit Type
A)
Install the Bluetooth Interface Unit to the slot on the controller board.
If you choose to install the Bluetooth, remove the USB2.0 Interface Board and you cannot install the 802.11b Interface
Unit or 1394 Interface Unit.
T
H
Install the Network Interface
Board
(Network Interface Board Type
3000)
T
4
Install the Network Interface Board to the slot on the controller board, only for basic model printer.
If you choose to install the Network Interface Board, you
cannot install the 1394 Interface Unit, 802.11b Interface Unit
or Bluetooth Interface Unit.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 5 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Available Options
I
Install the module to the User Account Enhance Unit slot on
Install the User Account Enhance the controller board.
Unit.
(User Account Enhance Unit
Type B)
1
T
Install options in the positions as shown in the illustration.
❖ Exterior
1
2
ZHBH050E
1. AD440 (Duplex Unit)
Install to the back of the front cover.
Makes duplex prints.
See p.11 “AD440 (Duplex Unit)”.
2. PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000
Loads up to 530 sheets of paper. Up to
two units can be attached to the printer. "Tray 2" appears on the panel display for the first unit and "Tray 3"
appears on the panel display for the
second unit.
See p.8 “PAPER FEED UNIT Type
3000”
5
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 6 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
❖ Basic model Printer : Interior
1
2
1
3
4
5
7
6
1. Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
Install Printer Hard Disk to the controller board.
See p.16 “Printer Hard Disk Type
3000”.
2. User Account Enhance Unit Type
B
See p.38 “User Account Enhance Unit
Type B”.
3. 802.11b Interface Unit Type A
Note
❒ 802.11b Interface Unit, USB2.0 Interface Board, Bluetooth Interface
Unit and 1394 Interface Unit cannot be installed in the printer at the
same time.
See p.25 “802.11b Interface Unit Type
A”.
4. Bluetooth Interface Unit
Note
❒ Bluetooth Interface Unit, USB2.0
Interface Board, 802.11b Interface
Unit and 1394 Interface Unit cannot be installed in the printer at the
same time.
6
ZHBHA061E
5. 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
Note
❒ 1394 Interface Unit, USB2.0 Interface Board, Bluetooth Interface
Unit and 802.11b Interface Unit
cannot be installed in the printer at
the same time.
See p.19 “1394 Interface Unit Type
4510”.
6. Netwok Interface Board Type
3000
Note
❒ Netwok Interface Board, USB2.0
Interface Board, 802.11b Interface
Unit, Bluetooth Interface Unit and
1394 Interface Unit cannot be installed in the printer at the same
time.
7. Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM
Module)
Install 64MB, 128MB, or 256MB RAM
into the slot on the controller board.
S ee p .1 3 “Me m ory U nit Type C
(SDRAM Module)”.
Important
❒ Remove USB2.0 Interface Board
when you install 1394 Interface
Unit, 802.11b Interface Unit,
Bluetooth Interface Unit or Netwok Interface Board.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 7 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Available Options
❖ Network standard model Printer : Interior
1
2
1
3
4
6
5
ZHBHA062E
1. Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
Install Printer Hard Disk to the controller board.
See p.16 “Printer Hard Disk Type
3000”.
2. User Account Enhance Unit Type
B
See p.38 “User Account Enhance Unit
Type B”.
3. 802.11b Interface Unit Type A
Note
❒ 802.11b Interface Unit, USB2.0 Interface Board, Bluetooth Interface
Unit and 1394 Interface Unit cannot be installed in the printer at the
same time.
See p.25 “802.11b Interface Unit Type
A”.
4. Bluetooth Interface Unit
5. 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
Note
❒ 1394 Interface Unit, USB2.0 Interface Board, Bluetooth Interface
Unit and 802.11b Interface Unit
cannot be installed in the printer at
the same time.
See p.19 “1394 Interface Unit Type
4510”.
6. Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM
Module)
Install 64MB, 128MB, or 256MB RAM
into the slot on the controller board.
S ee p .1 3 “Me m ory U nit Type C
(SDRAM Module)”.
Important
❒ Remove USB2.0 Interface Board
when you install 1394 Interface
Unit, 802.11b Interface Unit,
Bluetooth Interface Unit.
Note
❒ Bluetooth Interface Unit, USB2.0
Interface Board, 802.11b Interface
Unit and 1394 Interface Unit cannot be installed in the printer at the
same time.
7
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 8 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000
Preparation
When installing multiple options,
install the Paper Feed Unit first.
1
Up to two Paper Feed Units can be
attached to the printer. When installing two Paper Feed Units, connect the two units first by
following the procedure below before connecting the units to the
printer. Then, place the printer on
the connected two Paper Feed
Units.
R CAUTION:
• When moving the machine, each
person should hold the handles
that are located on opposite
sides, and then lift the machine
slowly. Lifting it carelessly or
dropping it may cause an injury.
• When moving the Paper Feed
Unit, hold the handles that are located on the top of the unit, and
then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may cause
an injury.
Note
❒ The printer weighs approximately
29.4 kg (64.8 lb.bond).
❒ The Paper Feed Unit weighs approximately 7.42 kg (16.4 lb.bond).
❒ "Tray 2" appears on the panel display when only one unit is installed. "Tray 3" appears on the
panel display for the second unit
when two units are installed.
8
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ Paper Feed Unit (including a paper
tray)
ZHBP310E
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
C Hold
the Paper Feed Unit as
shown in the illustration, and
then place it on a flat surface near
the place where the machine is to
be installed.
Note
❒ Be sure to work in a place with
enough space, so that you can
get behind the printer.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 9 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000
D Pull the paper tray out of the Pa-
per Feed Unit until it stops. After
that, lift it slightly, and then pull
it out completely. Place it on a flat
surface.
H Align the printer to the two upright pins on the Paper Feed Unit
and then lower it slowly.
1
ZHBP340E
ZHBYA930E
E Remove
the adhesive tape and
packing material.
Note
❒ Be sure not to place the printer
on the Paper Feed Unit cable.
ZHBP390E
ZHBYA950E
F Slide
the paper tray completely
into the Paper Feed Unit.
I Open the connector cover of the
printer.
G Lift
the printer using the inset
grips on both sides of the printer.
ZHBP360E
ZHBH750E
9
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 10 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
J Connect the Paper Feed Unit cable to the socket inside the printer
securely.
1
ZHBP370E
K Close the connector cover of the
printer.
ZHBP380E
To connect two Paper Feed Units,
connect the paper feed unit cable
to the socket inside the Paper Feed
Unit securely, and then close the
connector cover.
Note
❒ When moving or transporting
the printer, make sure to unplug the Paper Feed Unit connector. For more information,
see "Moving and Transporting
the Printer" in the Maintenance
Guide.
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the Paper
Feed Unit is installed properly.
Print the configuration page
f ro m t h e " L i st / T e s t P ri n t "
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see "Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2)" or "Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 3)" under the "Options"
list.
❒ If the Paper Feed Unit is not installed properly, reinstall it
from step C. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see "Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel" in
the Administrator Reference.
See "Loading Paper" in the
Maintenance Guide.
Important
❒ Before using the new Paper
Feed Unit, you must make settings in the printer driver.
ZHBP390E
10
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 11 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
AD440 (Duplex Unit)
AD440 (Duplex Unit)
R CAUTION:
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a "v" label (means
hot surface). Touching a part
with a "v" label (means hot surface) could result in a burn.
D Hold the Duplex Unit as shown in
1
the illustration, and then insert it
into the inside of the front cover.
A Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
B Check the contents of the package
for the following:
ZHBP270E
❖ Duplex Unit
ZHBP280E
ZHBP240E
C Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
Align the arrows, and then insert
the Duplex Unit until it clicks.
E Close the front cover.
ZHBP260E
ZHBP282E
11
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 12 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the Duplex
Unit is installed properly. Print
the configuration page from the
"List/Test Print" menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
"Duplex Unit" under the "Options" list.
❒ If the Duplex Unit is not installed properly, reinstall it
from step C. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
1
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
Important
❒ Before using the Duplex Unit,
you must make settings in the
printer driver.
12
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 13 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM Module)
Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM Module)
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ Before touching the Memory Unit,
touch something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static
electricity can damage the Memory Unit.
❒ Do not subject the Memory Unit to
physical shocks.
A Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
B Remove the two screws that fas-
C While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
1
ZHBP020E
There are two slots for the Memory
Unit. Use the available slot (the
one in the front in the illustration
B) to install an optional Memory
Unit
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBP100E
ZHBP080E
The removed screws will be used
in step G to fasten the controller
board.
Important
❒ In order to install the maximum
384 MB memory, remove the
standard Memory Unit A, and
then replace with the 128 MB
Memory Unit. Then install the
256 MB Memory Unit onto the
other slot (the one in the front in
the illustration B).
❒ When using only one Memory
Unit, be sure to use the slot in
the back shown in the illustration A.
13
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 14 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Note
❒ The following is the recommended combination of the
Memory Units.
1
Slot
CN2 (back
A)
CN3
(front B)
Total
memory
64 MB
None
64 MB
64 MB
64 MB
128 MB
64 MB
128 MB
192 MB
64 MB
256 MB
320 MB
128 MB
256 MB
384 MB
F Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
D Adjust the notch of the Memory
Unit to the slot, and then insert
vertically.
ZHBP070E
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
G Fasten the controller board to the
ZHBP110E
printer with the two screws that
you removed in step B.
E Press the Memory Unit down until it clicks into place.
ZHBP010E
ZHBP120E
14
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 15 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM Module)
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the Memory
Unit is installed properly. Print
the configuration page from the
"List/Test Print" menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
the memory capacity for "Total
Memory".
❒ If the Memory Unit is not installed properly, reinstall it
from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
1
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see "Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel" in
the Administrator Reference.
Important
❒ Before using the new Memory
Unit, you must make settings in
the printer driver.
15
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 16 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
1
Important
❒ Before touching the Printer Hard
Disk, touch something metal to
discharge any static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
Printer Hard Disk.
❒ Do not subject the Printer Hard
Disk to physical shocks.
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
C Remove the two screws that fas-
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBP080E
The removed screws will be used
in step H to fasten the controller
board.
D While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
ZHBPD010E
❖ Screw
ZHBP020E
B Turn off the power, and then un-
The Printer Hard Disk is to be installed to the position shown in the
illustration.
plug the power cable.
ZHBP160E
16
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 17 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
E Insert the Printer Hard Disk by
aligning it with the controller
board slot, sliding it in the direction of the arrow, and then connecting it to the connector on the
controller board.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
1
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
H Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws that
you removed in step C.
ZHBP170E
F Fasten the Printer Hard Disk using the supplied screw.
ZHBP010E
When the power is turned on, the
Printer Hard Disk will be formatted automatically.
ZHBP180E
G Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
ZHBP070E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the Printer
Hard Disk is installed properly.
Print the configuration page
f ro m t h e " L i st / T e s t P ri n t "
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see "Printer Hard Disk
Drive" for "Controller Option".
❒ If the Printer Hard Disk is not
installed properly, reinstall it
from step B. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
17
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 18 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
1
Important
❒ Before using the new Printer
Hard Disk, you must make the
settings in the printer driver.
Formatting the Printer Hard
Disk drive
If it becomes necessary to format the
Printer Hard Disk after initial setup,
execute "HDD Format" in the Maintenance menu.
Important
❒ Formatting the Printer Hard Disk
will delete all data.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
Menu:
Maintenance
18
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "HDD Format", and then
press the {Enter #}
} key.
A message to start to format is
shown.
Note
❒ If "HDD Format" is not displayed on the panel display, the
Printer Hard Disk is not installed properly. Reinstall it
from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after the
reinstallation, contact your sales
or service representative.
Important
❒ Do not turn off the power while
formatting the Printer Hard
Disk to avoid a printer malfunction.
D Press the {Enter #}} key.
The Printer Hard Disk is formatted, and a message to restart the
printer is shown.
E Turn off the power, and then turn
it back on.
Formatting the Printer Hard Disk
is completed and it is enabled to
use.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 19 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ Printing using "1394/Scsi Printer"
(Windows 2000) device and "IEEE
1394 and SCSI printers" (Windows
XP) with the optional 1394 Interface Unit is possible under Windo ws 2000 and Window s XP.
Printing with IP over 1394 is possible under Windows Me and Windows XP.
❒ Under Windows 2000, the 1394 Interface Unit can only be used with
Service Pack 1 or later. If the Service Pack is not installed, the connectable SCSI print device in a
1394 bus is only one. The client
cannot install the printer driver
without using an account with Administrators permission.
❒ Before touching the 1394 Interface
Unit, touch something metal to
discharge any static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
1394 Interface Unit
❒ Unplug all the interface cables
from the printer before installation. If you take out the controller
board with cables plugged in, the
1394 Interface Unit might be damaged.
❒ Do not plug or unplug the 1394 interface cable while installing the
printer driver
❒ Use the 1394 Interface cable that
comes with 1394 Interface Unit.
A Check the contents of the package
1
for the following:
❖ 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
ZHBP400E
❖ Interface Cable (6 pins × 6 pins)
❖ Interface Cable (6 pins × 4 pins)
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable and the interface cable.
19
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 20 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
C Remove the two screws that fasten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
1
Note
❒ The removed screws will be
used in step G to fasten the 1394
Interface Unit.
❒ Lift the end of USB2.0 Interface
Unit (A), and then remove it
from the controller board (B).
2
ZHBP080E
1
The removed screws will be used
in step I to fasten the controller
board.
D While
ZHBP450E
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
F Attach the 1394 Interface Unit to
the controller board. Insert the
end of the 1394 Interface Unit into
the opening (A
A), and then push
down until it clicks (B
B).
1
ZHBP020E
2
E Remove USB2.0 Interface Unit.
ZHBP050E
Confirm that the 1394 Interface
Unit is firmly connected to the controller board.
ZHBPB460E
20
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 21 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
G Fasten the 1394 Interface Unit on
the controller board using the
screws that you removed in step
E.
I Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws that
you removed in step C.
1
ZHBP010E
ZHBPB060E
H Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
ZHBP070E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the 1394 Interface Unit is installed properly. Print the configuration page
f ro m t h e " L i st / T e s t P ri n t "
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see "IEEE1394" for
"Controller Option".
❒ If the 1394 Interface Unit is not
installed properly, reinstall it
from step B. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set correctly.
21
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 22 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Connecting the cable to the
1394 Interface Unit
A Connect the interface cable to the
1
1394 interface port.
IEEE 1394 Configuration
Use this procedure to configure the
printer for use in the IEEE 1394 environment. The following table shows
the control panel settings and their
default values. These items are included in the "Host Interface" menu.
Setting Name
ZHBP090E
Note
❒ Either connector can be used.
❒ If you use a interface cable (6
pins x 6 pins) connect the end
with the ferrite core to the printer.
B Connect the other end to the host
computer.
Value
IP Address1394
000.000.000.000
Subnet Mask1394
000.000.000.000
IP over 1394
Active
SCSI print
Active
Bidi-SCSI print
Active
Depending on the protocol you use,
procedures vary. See the following table.
IP over 1394
Steps A-H and then
go to steps M to N
SCSI print
Steps A-D and then
go to steps I to N
A Press {Menu}}.
Important
❒ You cannot plug devices together to create loops.
❒ Do not use a cable more than 4.5
meters (14.8 feet) long.
ZHBS010E
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display “Host
Interface” menu.
Menu:
Host Interface
22
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 23 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
C Press {Enter #}}.
G Assign the IP address to the printer.
Do not overlap the IP address in
the same subnet or the same IP address in the network setting.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Host Interface:
I/O Buffer
D Press {U} or {T} to display “IEEE
1394 Setup”.
Host Interface:
IEEE 1394 Setup
E Press {Enter #}}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
IEEE 1394 Setup:
IP Address1394
F Press {U} or {T} to display “IP
over 1394”.
IEEE 1394 Setup:
IP over 1394
A Press {Enter #}
}.
B Press {U} or {T} to select either "Active" or "Not Active".
C Press {Enter #}
}.
The display returns to the previous menu in a few seconds.
1
Note
❒ To get the IP address for the
printer, contact your network
administrator.
A Press {U} or {T} until the following message appears.
IEEE 1394 Setup:
IP Address1394
B Press {Enter #}
}.
The current IP address appears
on the panel display.
IP Address1394:
000.000.000.000
C Press {U} or {T} to enter the
leftmost entry field of the IP
address.
IP Address1394:
192.000.000.000
D Press {Enter #}
}.
The pointer (k) moves to the
next entry field automatically.
IP Address1394:
192.02k.000.000
Note
❒ The value moves by 10 if {U}
or {T} is kept pressed.
❒ You can return the pointer
(k) to the previous (left) entry
field by pressing {Escape}
}.
23
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 24 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
❒ If you press {Escape}
} when
the pointer (k) is on the leftmost position, the selected IP
address is reset.
E Repeat steps C and D to enter
the IP address.
1
IP Address1394:
192.168.000.011
Check if the pointer (k) is at the
rightmost position, and press
{Enter #}
} to register the IP address you selected.
IEEE 1394 Setup:
IP Address1394
H Set
"Subnet Mask1394" in the
same way.
I Set "SCSI print" and "Bidi-SCSI
print" if necessary.
Note
❒ The default setting is "Active".
J Press {U} or {T} to display "SCSI
print".
IEEE 1394 Setup:
SCSI print
K Press {Enter #}}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
SCSI print:
*Active
L Press {U} or {T} to select either
"Active" or "Not Active", and then
press {Enter #}
}.
Set " Bidi-SCSI print " in the same
way.
24
M Press {On Line}}.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
N Print a configuration page to conf ir m t h e s et t i n g s m a d e . S e e
"Printing a Configuration Page"
in the Administrator Reference.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 25 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ Before touching the 802.11b Interface Unit, touch something metal
to discharge any static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
802.11b Interface Unit
❒ Do not subject the 802.11b Interface Unit to physical shocks.
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ 802.11b Interface Unit Type A
• Interface Unit
• Antenna
1
ZHBP430E
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
C Remove the two screws that fas-
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBP080E
ZHBP410E
• Card
The removed screws will be used
in step K to fasten the controller
board.
ZHBP420E
25
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 26 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
D While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
1
F Attach the 802.11b Interface Unit.
Insert the end of the 802.11b Interface Unit to the opening (A
A), and
then push down until it clicks
(B
B).
1
2
ZHBP020E
E Remove USB2.0 Interface Unit.
ZHBP190E
Confirm that the 802.11b Interface
Unit is firmly connected to the controller board.
G Fasten the 802.11b Interface Unit
on the controller board using the
screws that you removed in step
E.
ZHBPB460E
Note
❒ The removed screws will be
used in step G.
❒ Lift the end of USB2.0 Interface
Unit (A), and then remove it
from the controller board (B).
ZHBP200E
H Attach
the antenna to the card
with the label facing down and
the uneven side of the antenna
facing up.
2
1
ZHBP450E
26
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 27 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
I Insert
the card slowly into the
802.11b Interface Unit with the label facing down and the uneven
black antenna surface facing up
until it stops.
K Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws that
you removed in step C.
1
ZHBPB230E
ZHBP210E
J Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
ZHBP220E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the 802.11b
Interface Unit is installed properly. Print the configuration
page from the "List/Test Print"
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see "IEEE 802.11b" for
"Controller Option".
❒ If the 802.11b Interface Unit is
not installed properly, reinstall
it from step B. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
27
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 28 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
Configuration
1
Configure the printer for using the
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN). The following table shows the control panel
settings and their default values.
These items are included in the "Host
Interface" menu.
Setting Name
B Press {U} or {T} to display “Host
Interface” menu.
Menu:
Host Interface
C Press {Enter #}}.
Default Value
Comm. Mode
802.11 Ad hoc
Channel
• Inch version
(1-11) 11
• Metric version
(1-13) 11
Trans. Speed
Auto
WEP Setting
Not Active
ZHBS040E
In order to use the IEEE 802.11b
(Wireless LAN), select "IEEE 802.11b"
for "LAN Type" in "Network Setup"
of the Host Interface menu, and then
set "IP Address", "Subnet Mask",
"Gateway Address", "DHCP", "Frame
Type (NW)" and "Active Protocol" in
the "Network Setup". For more information about setting the items in the
"Network Setup", see the Quick Installation Guide.
A Press {Menu}}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Host Interface:
I/O Buffer
D Press {U} or {T} to display "IEEE
802.11b".
Host Interface:
IEEE 802.11b
E Press {Enter #}}.
Be sure that "Comm. Mode" appears on the panel display.
IEEE 802.11b:
Comm. Mode
F Press {Enter #}}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
ZHBS010E
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
28
Comm. Mode:
*802.11 Ad hoc
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 29 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
G Press
{U} or {T} to select the
transmission mode.
Note
❒ The factory default is “802.11
Ad hoc”.
❒ To use an IEEE 802.11b card for
which the SSID (Network
Name) setting is not necessary,
select "Ad hoc".
H Press {Enter #}}.
The display returns to the previous
menu in a few seconds.
I If "802.11 Ad hoc" or "Ad hoc" is
selected for "Comm. Mode", set
the channel to use for transmission.
Note
❒ Confirm the network administrator for the channel to use.
A Press {U} or {T} to display
"Channel".
IEEE 802.11b:
Channel
B Press {Enter #}
}.
The channel currently used appears on the panel display.
Channel:
(1-11)
11
C Press {U} or {T} to enter the
channel.
D Press {Enter #}
}.
J Set
"Trans. Speed" in the same
way.
Note
❒ The factory default is “Auto”. If
you need to change the transmitting speed depending on environment you are using, select
the appropriate transmitting
speed.
1
K Press the {U} or {T} key to display "SSID", and then press the
{Enter #}
} key.
IEEE 802.11b:
SSID
The following message appears on
the panel display.
SSID:
Enter ID
Note
❒ The factory default is “ASSID”.
❒ If an SSID has been set, you can
check the set SSID. Press the
{ U } or { T } key to display
"View", and then press the {Enter #}
} key.
A Press the {Enter #}
} key.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
SSID:
k
[ 0]
Note
❒ The value in brackets at the
upper right is the number of
characters entered.
29
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 30 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
B Press the {U} or {T} key to select characters, and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
SSID:
A
1
[ 1]
The pointer (k) moves to the
next character position.
SSID:
Ak
[ 1]
C Continue entering the key.
Note
❒ The characters that can be
used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32
bytes).
❒ If you press the {Escape}
} key,
the pointer (k) moves to the
previous character position.
D After entering the key, press
the {Enter #}
} key twice.
SSID:
[32]
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
The screen returns to step K.
L Press the {U} or {T}key to display "WEP Setting".
IEEE 802.11b:
WEP Setting
A Press the {Enter #}
} key.
WEP Setting:
*Not Active
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Active", and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
WEP Setting:
Active
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Change WEP Key:
Yes
Note
❒ When setting the WEP Setting to "Active", you will
need to enter the WEP key. If
you have not entered the key,
be sure to enter it.
❒ If you have entered the WEP
key and change the setting,
press the {U} or {T} key to
display "No", and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
C Press the {Enter #}
} key.
WEP Key:
k
[ 0]
Note
❒ The value in brackets at the
upper right is the number of
characters entered.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select characters, and then press
the {Enter #}
} key.
WEP Key:
0
[ 1]
The pointer (k) moves to the
next character position.
WEP Key:
0k
30
[ 1]
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 31 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
802.11b Interface Unit Type A
E Continue entering the key.
Note
❒ You can enter either 10 or 26
characters. If the key you enter is not 10 or 26 characters
long, the following message
appears.
1
Error: Enter 10
or 26 characters
❒ If you press the {Escape}
} key,
the pointer (k) moves to the
previous character position.
F After entering the key, press
the {Enter #}
} key.
WEP Key:
[26]
0000000000000000
The screen returns to step L.
M Press {On Line}}.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
N Print a configuration page to conf i r m th e s e t t i n g s m a d e . S e e
"Printing a Configuration Page"
in the Administrator Reference.
31
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 32 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type A
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch inside the controller
board compartment. It may
cause a machine malfunction or
a burn.
1
Important
❒ Before manipulating the Bluetooth
Interface Unit, touch any metal
thing to discharge static electricity.
Static electricity thing damage the
Bluetooth Interface Unit.
❒ Do not subject the Bluetooth Interface Unit to physical shocks.
• Bluetooth Module
ZHBP520E
• Antenna Cap
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ Bluetooth
• Interface Unit
ZHBPA921E
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
C Remove the two screws that fas-
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBP410E
• Card
ZHBP080E
The removed screws will be used
in step L to fasten the controller
board.
ZHBP510E
32
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 33 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type A
D While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
F Attach
the Bluetooth Interface
Unit. Insert the end of the Bluetooth Interface Unit to the opening (A
A ), and then push down
until it clicks (B
B).
1
1
2
ZHBP020E
E Remove USB2.0 Interface Unit.
ZHBP190E
Confirm that the Bluetooth Interface Unit is firmly connected to the
controller board.
G Fasten
the Bluetooth Interface
Unit on the controller board using
the screws removed in step E.
ZHBPB460E
Note
❒ The removed screws will be
used in step G
❒ Lift the end of USB2.0 Interface
Unit (A), and then remove it
from the controller board (B).
ZHBP200E
H Insert
the card slowly into the
Bluetooth Interface Unit with its
side labeled "INSERT" facing up
until it stops.
2
1
ZHBP450E
ZHBP530E
33
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 34 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
I Press the antenna to extend it.
L Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
1
ZHBPA530E
J Attach the antenna cap over the
antenna.
ZHBO550E
ZHBPA920E
K Adjust the Bluetooth module
to
the slot, and then insert vertically.
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
M Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws removed in step C.
ZHBP540E
ZHBPB560E
34
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 35 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Network Interface Board Type 3000
Network Interface Board Type 3000
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ Before touching the Network Interface Board, touch something
metal to discharge any static electricity. Static electricity can damage the Network Interface Board.
❒ Do not subject the Network Interface Board Interface Unit to physical shocks.
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ Network Interface Board Type 3000
ZHBP910E
C Remove the two screws that fas-
1
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBPA080E
The removed screws will be used
in step I to fasten the controller
board.
D While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
ZHBPA020E
E Remove USB2.0 Interface Unit.
❖ Ferrite Core × 2
ZHBP911E
ZHBPB460E
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
35
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 36 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
Note
❒ The removed screws will be
used in step G.
❒ Lift the end of USB2.0 Interface
Unit (A), and then remove it
from the controller board (B).
1
G Fasten
the Network Interface
Board on the controller board using the screws that you removed
in step E.
2
1
ZHBPC060E
ZHBP450E
F Attach
the Network Interface
Board. Insert the end of the Network Interface Board to the opening (A
A ), and then push down
until it clicks (B
B).
H Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
1
2
ZHBPA050E
Confirm that the Network Interface Board is firmly connected to
the controller board.
I Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws that
36
ZHBPA070E
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 37 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Network Interface Board Type 3000
you removed in step C.
Connecting the Network
Interface Cable to the Network
A Turn off the power
B Loop the network interface cable
1
and attach the ferrite core.
ZHBPA010E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the Network
Interface Board is installed
properly. Print the configuration page from the "List/Test
Print" menu. If it is installed
properly, you will see "Option
Ethernet Board" for "Controller
Option".
❒ If the Network Interface Board
is not installed properly, reinstall it from step B. If you cannot
install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
Note
❒ Attach two ferrite cores to the network interface cable. One of them
must be attached close to the end
of the cable (on the end closet to
the printer). The other must be attached approximately 45 cm (18")
(A) apart from the end. Attach
each ferrite core with a loop.
ZHBP913E
C Attach the network interface ca-
ble to the jack on the Network Interface Unit.
ZHBP1470E
D Connect the other end of the net-
work interface cable to the network.
E Turn on the power.
37
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 38 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
User Account Enhance Unit Type B
R WARNING:
• Do not place the IC2 lithium
battery near or into fire, or it
will explode and cause a burn.
1
A Check the contents of the package
for the following:
❖ User Account Enhance Unit
• The User Account Enhance
Unit installed on the controller
board has a IC2 lithium battery
which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the User
Account Enhance Unit only
with the indicated one.
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment. It
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Note
❒ Disposal should take place at an
authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. An IC2 lithium
battery is inside the User Account
Enhance Unit.
❒ If you dispose the unit, separate
the IC2 lithium battery from the
board, and then dispose of them
according to the local regulations.
Important
❒ Before touching the User Account
Enhance Unit, touch something
metal to discharge any static electricity. Static electricity can damage the User Account Enhance
Unit.
❒ Do not subject the User Account
Enhance Unit to physical shocks.
38
❖ Screw
Note
❒ The other screw supplied is not
to be used.
B Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
C Remove the two screws that fas-
ten the controller board on the
back of the printer.
ZHBP080E
The removed screws will be used
in step H to fasten the controller
board.
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 39 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
User Account Enhance Unit Type B
D While
holding the handle, pull
out the controller board slowly.
F Align the screw hole of the User
Account Enhance Unit and the
controller board, and then fasten
the User Account Enhance Unit
on the controller board using a
supplied screw.
1
ZHBP020E
The User Account Enhance Unit is
to be installed to the position
shown in the illustration.
ZHBP150E
G Align the controller board to the
top and bottom rails, and then
push in slowly until it stops.
ZHBP130E
E Set
Note
❒ When installing other options
on the controller board, do not
close the controller board, but
go to the steps for installing the
option.
the User Account Enhance
Unit on the controller board in the
direction shown in the illustration.
ZHBP070E
ZHBP140E
Important
❒ The printer may not work properly if the controller board is not
set properly.
Confirm that the User Account Enhance Unit is firmly connected to
the controller board.
39
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 40 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
Options
H Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws that
you removed in step C.
1
ZHBP010E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the User Account Enhance Unit is installed
properly. Print the configuration page from the "List/Test
Print" menu. If it is installed
properly, you will see "Accounting Module" for "Controller Option".
❒ If the User Account Enhance
Unit is not installed properly,
reinstall it from step B. If you
cannot install it properly even
after attempting reinstallation,
contact your sales or service
representative.
Reference
See "Making Printer Settings
with the Control Panel" in the
Administrator Reference for
printing the configuration page.
40
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 41 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
INDEX
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510, 6, 7, 19
802.11b Interface Unit Type A, 25
A
AD440 (Duplex Unit), 5, 11
Available Options, 3
M
Memory Unit Type C (SDRAM Module),
6, 7, 13
N
Netwok Interface Board Type 3000, 6
Network Interface Board Type 3000, 35
O
Options, 3
P
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000, 5, 8
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000, 6, 7, 16
U
User Account Enhance Unit Type B, 6, 7, 38
41
AresPGBOptionSetup-F_FM.book Page 42 Monday, July 29, 2002 1:12 PM
MEMO
42
EE
GB
G081
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=44 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm
ZPIntroduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This
printer contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good copy quality, supplier recommends that you use genuine supplier's toner.
Supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine supplier's office product.
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
•
The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95.
•
The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
•
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
•
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
•
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
•
The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Copyright © 2002
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=44 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111
Option Setup Guide
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio CL3000, CL3000DN
Printed in The Netherlands
EE
GB
G081-6530
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
21/F., Tai Yau Building,
181, Johnston Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Option Setup Guide Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy
for future reference.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 7
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................................... 9
Confirming a Network Environment.................................................................................. 11
Print Server Configuration ...................................................................................................................12
Netware Configuration .........................................................................................................................13
1. Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration
Configuring the Protocols .................................................................................................... 14
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ............................................................................................14
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .......................................................................................................16
Installing Software................................................................................................................ 18
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .................................................................................................18
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver......................................................................................19
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver ................................................................................................24
Changing Port Settings .........................................................................................................................29
Setting Up Options ............................................................................................................... 30
Setting the Printer Shared ................................................................................................... 33
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
2
2. Windows XP Print Server Configuration
Configuring the Protocols .................................................................................................... 34
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ............................................................................................34
Installing Software................................................................................................................ 37
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .................................................................................................37
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver......................................................................................38
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver ................................................................................................43
Changing Port Settings .........................................................................................................................47
Setting Up Options ............................................................................................................... 48
Setting the Printer Shared ................................................................................................... 51
3. Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration
Configuring the Protocols .................................................................................................... 52
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing ............................................................................................52
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .......................................................................................................54
Installing Software................................................................................................................ 56
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .................................................................................................56
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver......................................................................................57
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver ................................................................................................62
Changing Port Settings .........................................................................................................................66
Setting Up Options ............................................................................................................... 67
Setting the Printer Shared ................................................................................................... 70
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
3
4. NetWare Configuration
Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel............................................ 71
NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings........................................................................................ 76
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin................................................................................................77
Setting Up as a Print Server..................................................................................................................77
Setting Up as a Remote Printer ............................................................................................................79
NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings.................................................................................... 83
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin................................................................................................84
Setting Up as a Print Server..................................................................................................................84
Setting Up as a Remote Printer ............................................................................................................88
5. Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin ............................................................................. 94
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration.................................................... 95
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel........................................................... 96
Changing the Paper Type .................................................................................................... 97
Managing the Number of Copies to be Printed ................................................................. 98
Configuring the Energy Save Mode.................................................................................... 99
Setting a Password.............................................................................................................. 100
6. Using a Web Browser
Going to the Top Page ........................................................................................................ 102
Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings............................................................................103
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
4
7. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Changing Names and Comments ...................................................................................... 108
SmartNetMonitor for Admin ..............................................................................................................109
Web Browser ......................................................................................................................................111
Displaying the Status of Printer ........................................................................................ 113
SmartNetMonitor for Admin ..............................................................................................................113
SmartNetMonitor for Client ...............................................................................................................114
Web Browser ......................................................................................................................................115
8. Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel
Menu Chart ......................................................................................................................... 116
Accessing the Main Menu .................................................................................................. 120
Paper Input Menu .............................................................................................................. 122
Paper Input Parameters.......................................................................................................................122
Changing the Paper Input Menu.........................................................................................................125
List/Test Print Menu .......................................................................................................... 129
List/Test Print Parameters ..................................................................................................................129
Printing a Configuration Page ............................................................................................................130
Interpreting the Configuration Page ...................................................................................................133
Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................. 136
Maintenance Menu Parameters .........................................................................................................137
Changing the Maintenance Menu.......................................................................................................141
System Menu ...................................................................................................................... 149
System Parameters.............................................................................................................................150
Changing the System Menu...............................................................................................................156
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
5
Host Interface Menu........................................................................................................... 159
Host Interface Parameters ..................................................................................................................160
Changing the Host Interface Menu.....................................................................................................168
PCL Menu ........................................................................................................................... 171
PCL Parameters ..................................................................................................................................171
Changing the PCL Menu ....................................................................................................................174
Language Menu .................................................................................................................. 177
Changing the Language Menu............................................................................................................177
9. Appendix
SNMP................................................................................................................................... 180
Spool Printing ..................................................................................................................... 181
Remote Maintenance by telnet .......................................................................................... 183
Using telnet.........................................................................................................................................183
Commands List...................................................................................................................................184
Getting Printer Information over the Network ............................................................... 206
Printer current status...........................................................................................................................206
Printer configuration...........................................................................................................................208
Understanding the Displayed Information ...................................................................... 212
Print Job Information..........................................................................................................................212
Print Log Information.........................................................................................................................213
Configuring the Network Interface Board..........................................................................................214
Message List ........................................................................................................................ 219
System Log Information.....................................................................................................................219
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
6
Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 228
Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network .......................................................................................228
PostScript Printing from Windows.....................................................................................................230
NetWare Printing................................................................................................................................230
Using DHCP .......................................................................................................................................231
Configuring a WINS Server ...............................................................................................................233
Memory Capacity and Paper Size..................................................................................... 235
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 237
Mainframe ..........................................................................................................................................237
Options ...............................................................................................................................................241
Information about Installed Software .............................................................................. 247
expat ...................................................................................................................................................247
JPEG LIBRARY ................................................................................................................................248
NetBSD...............................................................................................................................................248
INDEX ................................................................................................................................. 251
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be
liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual
• NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.
• NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.
Trademarks
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer,
Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Netscape, Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell, NetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
7
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
8
Solaris is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could
result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which
a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
9
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
10
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
11
Confirming a Network Environment
Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows NT (Server)
NetWare (Server)
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT
NetWare
(Client)
Macintosh
UNIX
❖ Connecting Printer and Computer
• Network connection (Ethernet cable)
• Parallel connection (parallel cable)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
12
Print Server Configuration
You can use Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 as a print server.
Print Server
Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0 Print Server
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
See p.14 “Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration”.
See p.34 “Windows XP Print Server Configuration”.
See p.52 “Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration”.
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
13
Netware Configuration
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a NetWare environment. The Network Interface
Board allows you to use the machine as either a print server or a remote printer.
Print Server
NetWare
File Server
Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows NT 4.0
Remote Printer
NetWare
Print Server
NetWare
File Server
Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000
See p.71 “NetWare Configuration”.
Windows XP Windows NT 4.0
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
1. Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, select "SmartNetMonitor", "Standard TCP/IP Port"
or "LPR Port" when installing the printer driver.
• SmartNetMonitor
See p.14 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.18 “Installing Software” and p.19 “Installing the PCL
5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.24 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
• Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port
See p.14 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.19 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or
p.24 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use "LPR Port", "Print Services for UNIX" must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the
TCP/IP protocol and IPP.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
14
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
15
Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see "Windows 2000 Configuration" in
Printer Client Reference that comes with this printer.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.231 “Using DHCP”.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories] and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
Configuring a Windows 2000 computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
16
C Confirm that "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" is selected in the [Components checked are used by
this connection:] box under the [General] tab.
Note
❒ If the check box for TCP/IP protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] under the [General] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows 2000 Help.
D Configure the TCP/IP protocols with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct.
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see "Windows 2000 Configuration" in
Printer Client Reference that comes with this printer.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
17
Configuring a Windows 2000 computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Confirm that "NetBEUI Protocol" is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box under the [General] tab.
Note
❒ If the check box for the NetBEUI protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Install] under the [General] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows 2000 Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
18
Installing Software
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Client, restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
19
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When
upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer drivers you want to use when the "Select Program" dialog box appears, and
then click [Next >].
You can select more than one printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
20
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
21
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI
address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Type the printer's network
path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
22
D
If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
C Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
D Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
E Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box.
F Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
C Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
D Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
E Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
K Double-click [Shared] to display the shared settings.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
23
L To share the printer, check the left side of the [Shared] box.
M Click the box under [Shared name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.33 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information
about the status of bidirectional transmission, see p.31 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.30 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
24
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next >].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
25
F Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [Next >].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
26
B
Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI
address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Type the printer's network
path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
27
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
D Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box, and then
click [Next>].
E Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
G Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
I Check [Share as:], and then click [Next >].
To change the printer name, change it in the [Share as:] box.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.33 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
28
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].
K Click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
L Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.30 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
29
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
30
Setting Up Options
You must set up installed options, paper size and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PostScript 3 printer driver, Click [Device Settings] tab.
D Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any settings you require.
E Click [OK] .
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
31
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
32
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
33
Setting the Printer Shared
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Select [Shared as:] under the [Sharing] tab.
D To share a printer with the users running a different version of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...].
Note
❒ If you have installed an alternative driver by checking [Shared], you do not have to follow this step.
E Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
2. Windows XP Print Server Configuration
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, select "SmartNetMonitor", "Standard TCP/IP Port"
or "LPR Port" when installing the printer driver.
• SmartNetMonitor
See p.34 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.37 “Installing Software” and p.38 “Installing the PCL
5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.43 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
• Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port
See p.34 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.38 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or
p.43 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use "LPR Port", "Print Services for UNIX" must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows XP to use the TCP/IP
protocol and IPP.
34
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
35
Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see "Windows XP Configuration" in
Printer Client Reference that comes with this printer.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.231 “Using DHCP”.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [All Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
36
Configuring a Windows XP computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows XP computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Control Panel], and then click [Network and Internet Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Confirm that "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" is selected in the [Components checked are used by
this connection:] box under the [General] tab.
Note
❒ If the check box for TCP/IP protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] under the [General] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows XP Help file.
D Configure the TCP/IP protocols with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm with the network administrator that the settings are correct.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
37
Installing Software
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Client, restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
38
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next >].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
39
F Select the printer drivers you want to use when the "Select Program" dialog box appears, and
then click [Next >].
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add].
B Click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
40
B
Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C
D
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
41
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
C Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
D Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box.
E Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
K Double-click [Shared] to display the shared settings.
L To share the printer, check the left side of the [Shared] box.
M Click the box under [Shared name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.51 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
42
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information
about the status of bidirectional transmission, see p.49 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.48 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
43
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
44
E Click [Next >].
F Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then [Next >].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
45
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C
D
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
D Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box, and then
click [Next>].
E Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
46
LPR Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
G Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
I Check [Share as:], and then click [Next >].
To change the printer name, change it in the [Share as:] box.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.51 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].
K Click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
47
L Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.48 “Setting Up Options”.
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
A From the [Printers and Faxes] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File]
menu, click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
48
Setting Up Options
You must set up installed options, paper size and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PostScript 3 printer driver, Click [Device Settings] tab.
D Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any settings you require.
E Click [OK] .
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
49
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows XP [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling]
must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
50
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows XP [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling]
must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
51
Setting the Printer Shared
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Select [Shared as:] under the [Sharing] tab.
D To share a printer with the users running a different version of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...].
Note
❒ If you have installed an alternative driver by checking [Shared], you do not have to follow this step.
E Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
3. Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, select "SmartNetMonitor" or "LPR Port" when installing the printer driver.
• SmartNetMonitor
See p.52 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.56 “Installing Software” and p.57 “Installing the PCL
5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.62 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
• LPR Port
See p.52 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.57 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or
p.62 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use “LPR Port", "Microsoft TCP/ IP Printing" must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the TCP/IP
protocol and IPP.
Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
52
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
53
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see "Windows NT 4.0 Configuration"
in Printer Client Reference that comes with this printer.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.68 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
Configuring a Windows NT computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows NT computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that "TCP/IP Protocol" is
listed in the [Network protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab.
Note
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] under the [Protocols] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows NT Help.
B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm that the settings are correct with the network administrator.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
54
C Click the [Services] tab, and confirm that "Microsoft TCP/IP Printing" is installed.
If "Microsoft TCP/IP Printing" is not installed, click [Add] under the [Services] tab, and install it.
For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT Help.
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Windows NT to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see "Windows NT 4.0 Configuration"
in Printer Client Reference that comes with this printer.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
55
Configuring a Windows NT computer
Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows NT computer, and change the LAN adapter number (Lana Number).
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that "NetBEUI Protocol" is
listed in the [Network Protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab.
Note
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add...] under the [Protocols] tab, and install it. For
more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows NT Help.
B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click "NetBIOS Interface" in the [Network
Services:] box , and then click [Properties:].
C Click the Lana Number corresponding the Nbf protocol of the [Network Route] headline, and
then click [Edit].
D Type "0" as the Lana Number.
Note
❒ If another protocol’s Lana Number is configured at “0”, change it to another number other than
“0”.
E Click [OK].
F Click [Close], and then close the [Network] dialog box.
G After confirming the message to restart, click [Yes].
Note
❒ After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
56
Installing Software
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
57
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next >].
F Select the printer drivers you want to use when the "Select Program" dialog box appears.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
58
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
59
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about the printing of configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI address appears “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on a configuration page. Type the printer's network path name in form of "%%Computer name \Share name". Do not type "\\" as head
characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP settings dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
60
C
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
K Double-click [Shared] to display the shared settings.
L To share the printer, check the left side of the [Shared] box.
M Click the box under [Shared name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.70 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
61
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information
about the status of bidirectional transmission, see p.68 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.67 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
62
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
63
E Click [Next >].
F Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then [New Port...].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
64
B
Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI
address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Type the printer's network
path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
65
LPR Port
A Select [Add Port:].
B Select [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
G Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
I Check [Shared:], and then click [Next >].
To change the printer name, change it in the [Share Name:] box.
Note
❒ Check [Shared] to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000], [Windows 95/98])
has already been selected.
❒ You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.70 “Setting the Printer Shared”.
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].
K Click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
L Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.67 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
66
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
67
Setting Up Options
You must set up installed options, paper size and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control Access permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Full Control Access permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control Access permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PostScript 3 printer driver, Click the [Device Settings] tab.
D Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any settings you require.
E Click [OK] .
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
68
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows 95/98/Me,
the unavailable functions are shaded.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows NT 4.0 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
69
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows NT 4.0 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
70
Setting the Printer Shared
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control Access permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Full Control Access permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control Access permission.
Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Select [Shared] in the [Sharing] tab.
Note
❒ If you use alternate drivers for Windows 95/98/Me client, service pack 4 or more is required. And
install the appropriate printer driver for each client.
D To share a printer with the users running a different version of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...].
Note
❒ If you have installed an alternative driver by checking [Shared], you do not have to follow this step.
E Click [OK].
The printers attached to the network are displayed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
4. NetWare Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure the printer to use as a print server or a remote printer in a NetWare environment.
Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control
Panel
Note
❒ The IPX/SPX protocol must be installed on your computer. If it is not, see Windows Help for instructions.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Host Interface".
Menu:
Host Interface
71
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
72
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Host Interface:
I/O Buffer
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Network Setup".
Host Interface:
Network Setup
E Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Network Setup:
IP Address
F Select the NetWare protocol.
Note
❒ All protocols are active by the default.
❒ Do not select protocols that are not used on your network.
❒ If you use Pure IP on NetWare 5.1, configure the printer to active the TCP/IP protocol.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
73
A Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Active Protocol", and then press the {Enter #}
} key.
Active Protocol:
TCP/IP
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "NetWare".
C Press the {Enter #}
} key.
The current setting appears on the panel display.
NetWare:
*Active
G Select the frame type for NetWare.
Select one of the following items if necessary.
• Auto (Default)
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet ll
• Ethernet SNAP
Note
❒ In most situations, use the default setting ("Auto "). When you first select "Auto ", the frame type
first detected by the printer is adopted. If the network can use more than two frame types, the
printer may fail to select the correct frame type if "Auto " is selected. In this case, select the appropriate frame type.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
74
A Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Frame Type (NW)".
Network Setup:
Frame Type (NW)
B Press the {Enter #}
} key.
The current setting appears on the panel display.
Frame Type (NW):
*Auto
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the frame type you want to use.
D Press the {Enter #}
} key.
In about two seconds, the display returns to "Network Setup".
E Press the {On Line}
} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
H Print the configuration page to check settings you have made.
For more information about how to print a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration
Page”.
❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Using a printer in a NetWare environment, configure the NetWare printing environment by using
SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
75
Note
❒ If you configure the NetWare printing environment by using SmartNetMonitor for Admin under
the following environments, NetWare Client provided by Novell is required.
•
NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me
•
NDS or Bindary mode in Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0
❒ Use the version of Novell Client provided with your operating system or the latest version.
❖ Printers listed by SmartNetMonitor for Admin
SmartNetMonitor for Admin displays a list of printers, which are connected to the network.
If you cannot find out the printer from the displayed list, refer to the configuration page printed
from the printer. For more information about printing a configuration page, see p.130 “Printing
a Configuration Page”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
76
NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings
The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on whether the Network Interface
Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure it
in the NetWare 3.x environment.
Note
❒ This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environment for NetWare Print
Service is available.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
77
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Install SmartNetMonitor for Admin on your computer. For the installation procedure, see p.94 “Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin”.
After installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin, go to p.77 “Setting Up as a Print Server” to use this computer as a print server, or to p.79 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer” to use it as a remote printer.
Setting Up as a Print Server
A Log on to the file server as Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.
B Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
C Click the [Group] menu, and click [Search Device], and then select [IPX/SPX].
A list of printers appears
Note
❒ If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print Configuration Page
from the printer and find the desired printer. For more information about printing the Configuration Page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer name appears on the list, match the frame types of the IPX/SPX protocol between
the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of
the computer. For more information about changing the frame type of equipment, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
D Select a printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
E Click to select [Wizard], and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
78
F Type the device name into the [Device Name] box and comment into the [Comment] box as necessary, and then click [Next].
G Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next].
H Click to select [Bindery Mode], type the file server name into the [File Server Name:] box, and
then click [Next].
In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created.
You can also select a file server from the list that appears by clicking [Browse].
I Type the print server name into the [Print Server Name] box, and the printer name into the
[Printer Name] box, and the print queue name into the [Print Queue Name] box, and then click
[Next].
• In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the NetWare print server within 47 characters.
• In the [Printer Name] box, type the name of the NetWare printer.
• In the [Print Queue Name] box, type the name of the print queue to be added to NetWare.
J After confirming the settings, click [Next].
The settings take effect, and the NIB Setup Tool exits.
K Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
L Turn the printer power off and on.
Note
❒ To confirm that the printer is configured correctly, type the following from the command prompt.
F:> USERLIST
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
79
Setting Up as a Remote Printer
A Log on to the file server as Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.
B Run the SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
C Click the [Group] menu, and click [Search Device], and then select [IPX/SPX].
A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the Configuration
Page from the printer and find the desired printer. For more information about printing the Configuration Page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer name appears on the list, match the frame types of the IPX/SPX protocol between
the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of
the computer. For more information about changing the frame type of equipment, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
D Select a printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
E Click to select [Property Sheet] and click [OK].
F Click the [NetWare] tab, and then make the following settings.
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be
created.
By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.
C In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
80
D In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the printer number.
Important
❒ Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server.
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
F After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
G On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
H Type "PCONSOLE" from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
I Create a print queue as follows:
Note
❒ If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step J.
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then press {Enter}
}.
B Press {INSERT}
}, and then type a print queue name.
C Press {ESC}
} to return to the [Available Options] menu.
J Create a printer as follows:
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information], and then press {Enter}
}.
B To create a new print server, press {INSERT}
}, and then type a print server name.
If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers shown in the [Print Server] list.
Important
❒ Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - A).
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
81
C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
E Select the printer which is indicated as "Not Installed".
Important
❒ Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the NIB Setup Tool.
(Step F - D).
F If you change the name of the printer, type a new name.
A name "Printer x" is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of the selected printer.
G As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
H Press the {ESC}
} key, and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
I Press the {ESC}
} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].
K Assign print queues to the created printer as follows:
A From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
B Select the printer created in step J.
C Press the {INSERT}
} key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
Note
❒ You can select more than one queue at a time.
D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
When you have finished the above steps, confirm that the queues are assigned.
L Press the {ESC}} key until "Exit?" appears, and then select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
82
M Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the NetWare Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Note
❒ If the printer works as configured, "Waiting for job" appears.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
83
NetWare 4.x, 5 - Advanced Settings
The actual procedures for configuring the printer differ depending on whether the Network Interface
Board is configured as a print server or as a remote printer. This section describes how to configure it
in the NetWare 4.x, 5 environment.
❖ To use NetWare 5
• If you use Pure IP, use the printer as a print server. You cannot use the printer as a remote printer
when you use Pure IP.
• If you use Pure IP, configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol. For more information about
how to make the settings, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
84
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Install SmartNetMonitor for Admin on your computer. For the installation procedure, see p.94 “Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin”.
After installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin, go to p.84 “Setting Up as a Print Server” to use this computer as a print server, or to p.88 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer” to use it as a remote printer.
Setting Up as a Print Server
A Log on to the file server as Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.
B Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
C Click the [Group] menu, and click [Search Device], and then select [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP].
A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ If you use Pure IP, select [TCP/IP].
❒ If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the Configuration
Page from the printer and find the desired printer. For more information about printing the Configuration Page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer name appears in the list, match the frame types of the IPX/SPX protocol between
the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of
the computer. For more information about changing the frame type of equipment, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
85
D Select a printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
Note
❒ If you use Pure IP, see p.86 “Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 Environment”
E Click to select [Wizard], and then click [OK].
F Type the device name into the [Device Name] box and comment into the [Comment] box as necessary, and then click [Next].
G Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next].
H Click to select [NDS Mode], type the file server name into the [File Server Name:] box, the NDS
tree name into the [NDS Tree:] box and the context into the [NDS Context:] box, and then click
[Next].
In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created.
You can also select a file server from the list that appears by clicking [Browse].
By clicking [Browse], you can select a NDS context among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if
you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type "NET.DS".
I Type the print server name into the [Print Server Name] box, and the printer name into the
[Printer Name] box, and the print queue name into the [Print Queue Name] box, and the print
queue volume into the [Print Queue Volume], and then click [Next].
• In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the NetWare print server within 47 characters.
• In the [Printer Name] box, type the name of the NetWare printer.
• In the [Print Queue Name] box, type the name of the print queue to be added to NetWare.
• In [Print Queue Volume], type the print queue volume. As a volume, object names are typed from
a lower object and divided by a period. You can select a volume by clicking [Browse].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
86
J After confirming the settings, click [Next].
The settings take effect, and the NIB Setup Tool exits.
K Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
L Turn the printer power off and on.
Note
❒ To confirm that the printer is configured correctly, type the following from the command prompt.
F:> NLIST USER /A/B
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user.
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 Environment
A Log on to the file server as Admin or an Admin equivalent.
B Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
The [NIB Setup Tool] dialog box appears.
D Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.
A In the [Print Server Name:] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name:] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to
be created.
By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse File Server]
dialog box.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
87
C In the [NDS Context:] box, type the context of the print server.
By clicking [Browse], you can select NDS tree and a NDS context among those listed in the
[Browse Context] dialog box.
As context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if
you want to create a print server into Net under DS, type "NET.DS".
D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Print Server].
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
F After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].
E Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
After this step, go to step H on p.88 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
88
Setting Up as a Remote Printer
A Log on to the file server as Admin or an Admin equivalent.
B Run the SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
C Click the [Group] menu, and click [Search Device], and then select [IPX/SPX].
A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the Configuration
Page from the printer and find the desired printer. For more information about printing the Configuration Page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer name appears on the list, match the frame types of the IPX/SPX protocol between
the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of
the computer. For more information about changing the frame type of equipment, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
D Select a printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
E Click to select [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
F Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings.
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a print server is to be
created.
By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
89
C In the [NDS Context] box, type the context in which the print server is to be created.
By clicking [Browse], you can select context among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.
As context, object names are typed from a lower level object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, type "NET.DS".
D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
E In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the number of the printer.
Important
❒ Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print server.
F Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
G On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
H From Windows, run NWadmin.
Reference
For more information about NWadmin, see the documentation that comes with the NetWare.
I Create a print queue as follows:
A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in the directory tree,
and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click "Print Queue", and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
90
C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue.
D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click the [Browse] button.
E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then
click [OK].
F After confirming the settings, click [Create].
J Create a printer as follows:
A Select the container object the printer is located in, and then click [Create] in the [Object]
menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click "Printer", and then click [OK]. When you are using
NetWare 5, click "Printer (Non NDPS)".
C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer.
D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and then click [Create].
K Assign print queues to the created printer as follows:
A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step I, and then click [OK].
C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the drop-down
menu, and then click [Communication].
D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and then click [OK].
E After confirming the settings, click [OK].
L Create a print server as follows:
A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step I - A), and on the [Object]
menu, click [Create].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
91
B In the [Class of new object] box, click "Print Server", and then click [OK]. When you are
using NetWare 5, click "Print Sever (Non NDPS)".
C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server.
Important
❒ Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - A).
D Click [Define additional properties] to check a box, and click [Create].
M Assign the printer to the created print server as follows:
A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in the step K, and then click [OK].
C In the [Printers] group, click the printer assigned in step B, and then click [Printer Number].
D Type the printer number, and then click [OK].
Important
❒ Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the NIB Setup Tool.
(Step F - E).
E After confirming the settings, click [OK].
N Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the NetWare Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
5. Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, you can not only monitor the status of network printers, but also
allows you to change the configurations of the Network Interface Board using the TCP/IP protocol or
IPX/SPX protocol.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is equipped with the following functions.
• Device Information function
• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of devices.
• Checks the number of pages printed for each computer, using the user codes.
• Checks the results of print jobs executed from the computer.
• Enables you to change the printer's network settings.
• Device Settings function
• Limits the settings to be done from the control panel, and disables changes to be made to some
of the items.
• Enables the selection of paper type loaded in the printer.
• Energy Saver function
• Switches to the Energy Saver mode, and wakes up from the Energy Saver mode.
• System Status function
• Checks the information on printing, paper exhaustion, and such, on the computer.
• Groups function
• Monitors multiple printers at the same time. When there are many printers, you can create groups
and classify the printers to facilitate management.
92
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
93
OS
Protocol Stack
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98
Novell Client for Windows 95/98
Microsoft Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Microsoft Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client for Windows XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Note
❒ Select the appropriate protocol stack for your operating system.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
94
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin] installation, and then click [Next].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
95
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of
printers appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C On the list, Select a printer you want to change its configuration.
D From the [Tools] menu, select [NIB Setup Tool].
The NIB Setup Tool starts up.
E Select [Wizard] or [Property Sheet], and then click [Next].
• When configuring the Network Interface Board for the first time, select [Wizard].
• When changing the configuration of the Network Interface Board or configuring it in detail, select [Property Sheet].
Selecting [Wizard]
A Fill in the necessary items, and then click [Next].
Selecting [Property Sheet]
A A configuration list appears on the dialog box.
For more information about each item on the dialog box, see SmartNetMonitor for Admin Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
96
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C Select a desired printer.
D From the [Tools] menu, point [Device Settings], select [Lock Operation Panel Menu].
The Web browser starts up, and the screen that prompts you to type the user name and a password
appears.
E Type the user name and the password, and then click [OK].
The general configuration window appears.
F From the [Lock Operation Panel Menu] pull-down menu, select [Apply].
Note
❒ The Panel Lock function that can be set here is the same as that on the control panel of this machine.
G Click [Apply].
H Exit the Web browser.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
97
Changing the Paper Type
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C On the list, Select a printer whose paper type you want to change.
D From the [Tools] menu, point [Device Settings], select [Select Paper Type].
The Web browser starts up, and the screen that prompts you to type the user name and a password
appears.
E Type the user name and the password, and then click [OK].
The paper type configuration window appears.
F Select the sheet type, and then click [Apply].
G Exit the Web browser.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
98
Managing the Number of Copies to be Printed
Preparation
Optional User Account Enhance Unit Type B must be installed to manage the number of copies to
be printed. For more information about installing the User Account Enhance Unit Type B, see "User
Account Enhance Unit Type B" in the Option Setup Guide.
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C On the list, Select a printer whose statistics information you want to manage.
D From the [Tools] menu, select [User Management Tool].
The screen that prompts you to type a password appears.
E Type the password, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ The factory default password is "password".
The User Code Maintenance Tool starts up.
For more information about using the User Management Tool, see SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
99
Configuring the Energy Save Mode
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C Select the device you want to make a setting for.
You do not need to select anything if you want to make a setting for all the devices in the group.
D Click [Group] and point to [Energy Save Mode].
E To make a setting only for the device you have selected, click [Set Individually].
F To make a setting for all the devices in the group, click [Set By Group].
G Then select any energy saver mode from the menu that appears.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
100
Setting a Password
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C On the list, Select a printer you want to change its configuration.
D From the [Tools] menu, select [NIB Setup Tool].
The NIB Setup Tool starts up.
Note
❒ To prevent the Network Interface Board configuration from being changed accidentally by someone other than the network administrator, you can set a password in [NIB Setup Tool] that is different from the network password. Click [Option] to set a password in [NIB Setup Tool].
E Select [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
F Click the [Password] tab.
G Click [Change Password], and enter a password, and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
6. Using a Web Browser
101
The Network Interface Board functions as a Web server or as a network printer. You can use a Web
browser to view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board.
❖ Configuring the printer
This requires the TCP/IP protocol to be installed. After the printer has been configured to use the
TCP/IP protocol, it will be possible to adjust the settings using a Web browser.
Reference
For more information about configuring the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol, see “CONFIGURING THE PRINTER FOR THE NETWORK” in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ Operating system browser requirements
OS
Browser
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or later
Netscape Navigator 4.06 or later
Mac OS 8.1 or later
Mac OS X v10.1
Solaris 2.5/2.6/2.7/7/8
Limitation
❒ Sometimes after clicking [Back] , the previous page may not appear. In this case, click [Refresh]
or [Reload] .
❒ The text on the screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if the font size settings of the
browser are too large. It is recommended that you use a font size equal to or smaller than "10
points" with Netscape Navigator, and "Medium" or smaller with Internet Explorer.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
102
Going to the Top Page
After launching the Web Browser, type the IP address of the printer. See the example below. This example is for the English version.
http://192.168.15.16/
(In this example, the IP address of the Network Interface Board is 192.168.15.16.)
Note
❒ If a DNS server is used on the network, you can type the host name as an URL. For example, http://webmonitor.netprinter.com/. In order to do this, you must register the IP address and the host
name of the Network Interface Board with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for information about how to do this.
❒ When you use the proxy server, you must set up the proxy server address for the Web browser you
are using. Consult the network administrator for information about how to set the proxy server.
1. Header Buttons
You can register favorite URLs with [URL]. To
view the Help section, click [Help].
Important
❒ It costs to use the browser to access a Website.
Note
❒ The Help file is stored in the following folder
on the CD-ROM in HTML format. The third
folder, "(Language)" may be substituted by
an appropriate language name.
\HELP\WSMHLP\(Language)\
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
103
2. Menu Buttons
Buttons to configure the Network Interface Board
and confirm the status of the printer.
Note
❒ When you click [Network Config], a dialog
box appears requesting the user name and
a password. Type only the password in this
dialog box. The factory default password is
"password".
❒ The password is the same as that used for
remote maintenance and that used in the
NIB Setup Tool. If you change a password
with the Web browser, other passwords are
also changed.
3. Status
Displays the name and comments of the Network
Interface Board, and the printer status.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings
A Start the Web browser.
B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
where the Xs are the number of the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.
C Click [Configuration].
The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.
D Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the factory default account, enter no user name and type "password" for the password.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
104
E Click the item you want to configure, and then make all the settings.
The following items can be configured:
❖ [General]
Configure the general settings for the machine here.
❖ [TCP/IP]
Configure the TCP/IP-related settings for the Network Interface Board, the optional 802.11b Interface Unit, and the optional 1394 Interface Unit.
❖ [SNMP]
Configure the appropriate community settings here. Up to 10 types of community names can be
registered.
❖ [NetWare]
Configure the settings for printing in a NetWare environment here.
❖ [AppleTalk]
Configure the Network Interface Board or the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to
the AppleTalk protocol.
❖ [NetBEUI]
Configure the Network Interface Board or the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to
the NetBEUI protocol here.
❖ [IEEE 1394]
Configure the optional 1394 Interface Unit settings related to IP over 1394 and SCSI print (SBP-2).
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when the optional 1394 Interface Unit is installed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
105
❖ [IPP Authentication]
If using the IPP protocol, configure the authentication settings for printing here.
❖ [Paper Type]
Select the paper type loaded in the machine from the drop-down menu.
❖ [Password]
Follow the procedure below to change the password.
Enter the password to change the network and machine settings or delete spooled print jobs.
❖ [IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)]
Configure the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to communication.
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when the optional 802.11b Interface Unit is installed.
Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings
A Start the Web browser.
B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
where the Xs are the number of the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.
C Click [Config. Reference].
The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
106
D Click the item you want to check.
The following items can be checked:
❖ [General]
Shows general settings for the machine.
❖ [TCP/IP]
Shows the TCP/IP-related settings for the Network Interface Board, the optional 802.11b Interface Unit, and the optional 1394 Interface Unit.
❖ [NetWare]
Shows the settings for printing in a NetWare environment.
❖ [AppleTalk]
Shows the Network Interface Board or the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to the
AppleTalk protocol.
❖ [NetBEUI]
Shows the Network Interface Board or the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to the
NetBEUI protocol.
❖ [IEEE 1394]
Shows the optional 1394 Interface Unit settings related to IP over 1394 and SCSI print (SBP-2).
❖ [IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)]
Shows the optional 802.11b Interface Unit settings related to communication.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
107
- Linking the address (URL) to the [Help] button
You can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the Help files on the computer or on a Web server.
A Copy the Help files on the CD-ROM to a desired location. The Help files are located in folders labeled with abbreviated language names. For example, English Help files are in the [EN] folder. Be
sure to copy the entire [EN] folder to the new location.
B Using a Web browser, navigate to the Top Page, and then click [Network config].
C Type your password, (it is not necessary to type a user name), and then click [OK].
D Type the path to the Help files in the [Help URL] box.
If you copied the Help files to "C:\HELP\EN", type "file://C:/HELP/". For example if you copied
the files to a Web server and the index URL is "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html", type "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/".
E Click [Apply].
When a warning message appears, select to continue the configuration.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
7. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Changing Names and Comments
You can change printer names and make a comment on printers to easily identify the printers listed on
SmartNetMonitor for Client.
The following utilities are used to change printer names and comments.
❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Allows you to change names and comments when the TCP/IP protocol or IPX/SPX protocol is
available. You can install SmartNetMonitor for Admin from the CD-ROM that comes with the
printer. For more information about installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see p.84 “Installing
SmartNetMonitor for Admin”.
❖ Web Browser
Allows you to change names and comments when the TCP/IP protocol is available.
Note
❒ Each of the names, in a TCP/IP protocol form (printer name) and in a NetBEUI protocol form, is
changed individually. Comments are, however, common to both of them.
❒ The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory
default name is "RNP627DD5". Comments are not configured.
108
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
109
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.
C On the list, Select a printer whose Network Interface Board you want to change its configuration.
D From the [Tools] menu, select [NIB Setup Tool].
The NIB Setup Tool starts up.
E Select [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
TCP/IP
A Click the [General] tab, and then type the device name into the [Device Name] box and comment into the [Comment] box.
• In the [Device Name] box, type the name of the printer within 13 characters. The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default
name is "RNP627DD5". No name of 9 characters is permitted if the prefix is "RNP". Also,
when DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the number of characters is limited to 13
characters.
• In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers within 31 characters.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
110
NetBEUI
A Click the [General] tab, and then type the comment into the [Comment] box.
In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers within 31 characters.
B Click the [NetBEUI] tab.
C Type the computer name into the [Computer Name] box.
• In the [Computer Name] box, type the name that helps you to identify printers using the NetBEUI protocol. The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 3 bytes of the MAC
address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the MAC address is
00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is "RNP627DD5". A maximum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase English letters, numeric, or symbols (except "*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and
space) can be used. No name is permitted if the prefix is "RNP". You must avoid the duplication of the same name on a network.
F Click [OK].
The NIB Setup Tool exits, and the setting is transmitted to the printer.
G Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
111
Web Browser
A Run the Web browser.
B Type the address "http:// (IP address of the printer you want to change the settings)".
The status of the selected printer is displayed on the Web browser.
C Click [Configuration].
A dialog box that prompts you to type the user name and a password appears.
D Type the user name and the password, and then click [OK].
Type only the password in this dialog box. The factory default password is "password".
E Change names and comments.
TCP/IP
A Click the [General] tab, and then type the name into the [Printer Name] box and comment
into the [Comment] box.
• In the [Printer Name] box, type the name of the printer within 13 characters. The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default
name is "RNP627DD5". No name of 9 characters is permitted if the prefix is "RNP". Also,
when DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the number of characters is limited to within
13 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers within 31 characters.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
112
B Click the [IEEE 1394], and then type the name into the [Device Name:] box when you change
the device name for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.
• In the [Device Name:] box, type the name of the printer within 13 characters. The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 5 bytes of the EUI-64 on the IEEE 1394 (IP over
1394) interface. For example, when the EUI-64 is 00:00:74:00:02:01:0A:66, the factory default name is "RNP0002010A66". No name of 13 characters is permitted if the prefix is
"RNP".
NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
B Type the name into the [Computer Name] box and comment into the [Comment] box.
• In the [Computer Name] box, type the name that helps you to identify printers using the NetBEUI protocol. The factory default name consists of "RNP" and the last 3 bytes of the MAC
address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the MAC address is
00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is "RNP627DD5". A maximum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase English letters, numeric, or symbols (except "*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and
space) can be used. No name is permitted if the prefix is "RNP". You must avoid the duplication of the same name on a network.
F Click [Apply].
The setting is transmitted to the printer.
G Exit the Web browser.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
113
Displaying the Status of Printer
You can view the status of printers using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, SmartNetMonitor for Client, or
Web browser.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX].
The status of printers is indicated with an icon in the list.
Note
❒ For more information about the status icons, see SmartNetMonitor for Admin Help.
C Getting further information, click the desired printer to select from the list, and then click
[Open] on the [Device] menu.
The status of the printer is displayed on the dialog box.
Note
❒ For more information about each item on the dialog box, see Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
114
SmartNetMonitor for Client
Viewing the status of printers using SmartNetMonitor for Client, you must, in advance, configure
SmartNetMonitor for Client so it monitors the printer whose status you want to view.
Monitoring Printers
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Client.
The SmartNetMonitor for Client icon appears at the right end of the taskbar.
B Right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon, and check if the desired printer is configured on the pop-up menu that appears.
If it is configured, see p.115 “Displaying the Status of Printers”.
C If the desired printer is not configured, click [Options] on the pop-up menu.
The [SmartNetMonitor for Client - Options] dialog box appears.
D Click the printer to be monitored, and select the [To Be Monitored] check box from the [Monitoring Information Settings] group.
Note
❒ Selecting the [Displayed on Task Bar] check box will bring up the status of a printer with an icon on
the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon on the task tray.
E Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
115
Displaying the Status of Printers
A Run SmartNetMonitor for Client.
B The status of printers is displayed on the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon on the task tray.
Note
❒ For more information about the status icons, see Help.
C Getting further information on the status, right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon,
and then click the desired printer.
The status of the printer is displayed on the dialog box.
Note
❒ For more information about each item on the dialog box, see Help.
Web Browser
A Run the Web browser.
B Type the address "http:// (IP address of the printer whose status you want to view)".
The status of the selected printer is displayed on the Web browser.
C Click [Status] and you can check the status of the printer.
Note
❒ For more information about each item, see Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
8. Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel
Menu Chart
This section describes how to change the default settings of the printer and provides information about
the parameters included in each menu.
Category
Function Menu
Sample Print
*1
Select Action / Error File(s)
Locked Print
*1
Select Action / Error File(s)
Paper Input ⇒ p.122
Bypass Size
Paper Type
Tray Locking
Tray Priority
List/Test Print ⇒ p.129
Config. Page
Menu List
Color Demo Page
PS Config. Page
PCL Config.Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance ⇒ p.136
Color Regist.
Image Density
Registration
PlainPaper Type
116
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
117
Category
Maintenance ⇒ p.136
Function Menu
Maint. Reset
HDD Format *2
ROM Update *3
4C.Graphic Mode
WL.LAN Signal *4
WL.LAN Defaults
Print Area
Key Repeat
Menu Protect *5
Series Prnt.Job *5
System ⇒ p.149
MisfeedRecovery
Prt. Err Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Copies
Printer Lang.
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Duplex *6
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
118
Category
System ⇒ p.149
Function Menu
Energy Saver 1
E. Saver2 Timer
Unit of Measure
Resolution
B&W Page Detect
Spool Printing *2
Letterhead Mode *5
E.Saver2 OnOff *5
Host Interface ⇒ p.159
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Network Setup *7
IEEE 1394 Setup *8
IEEE 802.11b *9
USB Setting *5
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
119
Category
PCL Menu ⇒ p.171
Function Menu
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Ext. A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Language ⇒ p.177
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
The "Sample Print" menu and the "Locked Print" menu appear only when the optional Printer Hard Disk
is installed.
The “HDD Format” and the "Spool Printing" menu appears only when the optional Printer Hard Disk is
installed.
ROM Update is not currently used.
The "WL.LAN Signal" menu appears only when "IEEE 802.11b" is selected in "LAN Type" in the Host
Interface menu.
While the printer is On Line, press the {Enter #}
} key, and then press the {Escape}
} key, finally press the
{Menu}
} key. You can access the "Menu Protect", "Series Prnt.Job" "Letterhead Mode", "E.Saver2
OnOff", "USB Setting" on the panel display.
The “Duplex” menu appears only when the optional AD440 is installed.
The “Network Setup” menu appears only when the optional Network Interface Unit or 802.11b Interface
Unit is installed.
The “IEEE 1394 Setup” menu appears only when the optional 1394 Interface Unit is installed.
The “IEEE 802.11b” menu appears only when the optional 802.11b Interface Unit is installed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
120
Accessing the Main Menu
Press the {Menu}
} key, and "Menu" appears on the panel display.
ZHBS010E
This menu shows the following 9 items which can be displayed one by one by pressing the {U} or {T} key.
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• Paper Input
• List/Test Print
• Maintenance
• System
• Host Interface
• PCL Menu
• Language
Note
❒ If the optional Printer Hard Disk is not installed, the "Sample Print" menu and the "Locked Print"
menu cannot be displayed on the control panel.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
121
❒ {T}: Press to go to the next page.
❒ {U}: Press to go back to the previous page.
❒ After making the printer settings, be sure to return to the previous menu by pressing the {Escape}
} key.
ZHBS020E
❒ After making the printer settings, press the {On Line}
} key to return to the "Ready" condition.
ZHBS050E
❒ The revised settings are not canceled even if the power switch is turned off.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
122
Paper Input Menu
There are 4 menu items in the "Paper Input" menu.
• Bypass Size
• Paper Type
• Tray Locking
• Tray Priority
Reference
For more information about loading paper in the tray, see the Option Setup Guide.
Paper Input Parameters
Menu
Bypass Size
Description
The paper size for the bypass tray.
For more information about paper sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see "Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer" in the Maintenance Guide.
8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13,
A4 (210x297), B5JIS (182x257), A5 (148x210), A6 (105x148), 16K (195x267),
4 1/8 x 9 1/2, 3 7/8 x7 1/2, C5 Env(162x229), C6 Env(114x162), DL
Env(110x220), Custom Size
Note
❒ Default: A4 (210x297) (Metric version), 11 x 8 1/2 (Inch version)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
123
Menu
Paper Type
Description
If you use different kinds of paper, set the paper type for Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3
or Bypass Tray.
For more information about paper sizes that can be set in each tray, see the Maintenance Guide.
❖ Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Bond Paper
❖ Bypass Tray
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted, Prepunched, Labels, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Transparency, Thick
Paper, Thick:Dup.Back, Glossy Paper
Note
❒ Default : Plain Paper
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
124
Menu
Tray Locking
Description
If you use different kinds of paper, you can lock a tray to prevent printing on
wrong paper such as letterhead or colored paper. When "Auto Select" is selected
in the Paper Source selections from the printer driver, the locked tray will not be
used. You can select each tray set to on or off.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3
Note
❒ Default : Off
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
❒ You can lock multiple trays.
❒ If you want to use the locked tray, you must select the tray from the
printer driver and the control panel each.
❒ When a locked tray is selected from the printer driver, the printer
does not search for another tray.
Tray Priority
You can set which tray should be checked first when "Auto tray Select" is selected in the Paper Source selections from the printer driver. When printing from
DOS, the tray selected here is used when no tray is selected for a print job.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3
Note
❒ Default : Tray 1
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
❒ It is recommended that you load paper of the size and direction you
most frequently use in the tray selected with "Tray Priority".
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
125
Changing the Paper Input Menu
Tray Locking
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Input", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
126
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Tray Locking", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Paper Input:
Tray Locking
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to change the tray locking off, and then press the
{Enter #}
} key.
Tray Locking:
Tray 1
Note
❒ The Bypass Tray would not be locked.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Off", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Tray 1:
*Off
Wait for two seconds.
"Paper Input" appears on the panel display.
F Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
127
Tray Priority
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Paper Input", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Tray Priority", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Paper Input:
Tray Priority
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select the tray type you want to use.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
128
E Press the {Enter #}} key. Wait for two seconds.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
F Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
129
List/Test Print Menu
There are 6 menu items in the "List/Test Print" menu.
• Config. Page
• Menu List
• Color Demo Page
• PS Config. Page
• PCL Config.Page
• Hex Dump
List/Test Print Parameters
Menu
Description
Config. Page
You can print the current configuration of the printer. See p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
Menu List
You can print the Menu List which shows the function menus of this printer.
Color Demo Page
You can print the Color Demo Page.
PS Config. Page
You can print a list of the installed PS Fonts.
PCL Config.Page
You can print the current configuration of the PCL.
Hex Dump
You can print the Hex Dump.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
130
Printing a Configuration Page
Reference
For more information, see p.133 “Interpreting the Configuration Page”.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display the "List/Test Print" menu.
Menu:
List/Test Print
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
131
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on the panel display.
List/Test Print:
Config. Page
D Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Printing...
In a short time, the printing of the configuration page will start.
Important
❒ If you cannot print the configuration page, check for an error message appears on the panel display. For more information about error messages, see "Troubleshooting" in the Maintenance
Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
132
E Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
133
Interpreting the Configuration Page
System Reference
❖ Printer ID
Shows the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
❖ Firmware Version
• Firmware
Shows the version number of the printer controller firmware.
• Engine
Shows the version number of the printer engine firmware.
• NCS
Shows the version number of the Network Interface Board.
❖ Pages Printed
Shows the total number of pages printed by the printer to date.
❖ Total Memory
Shows the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer.
❖ Controller Option
The item(s) appears when the controller option(s) is installed.
❖ Printer Language
Shows the version number of the printer language.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
134
❖ Options
Shows the options that you installed.
Paper Input
Shows the settings made under the "Paper Input" menu.
Reference
For more information, see p.122 “Paper Input Menu”.
Maintenance
Shows the settings made under the “Maintenance” menu.
Reference
For more information, see p.136 “Maintenance Menu”.
System
Shows the settings made under the "System " menu.
Reference
For more information, see p.149 “System Menu”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
135
PCL Menu
Shows the settings made under the "PCL Menu".
Reference
For more information, see p.171 “PCL Menu”.
Host Interface
Shows the settings made under the "Host Interface" menu.
When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
Reference
For more information about the "Host Interface" menu, see p.159 “Host Interface Menu”.
Interface Information
Shows the interface information.
Error Log
Shows the log of printer errors.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
136
Maintenance Menu
There are 13 menu items in the "Maintenance" menu.
• Color Regist.
• Image Density
• Registration
• PlainPaper Type
• Maint. Reset
• HDD Format
• ROM Update
• 4C.Graphic Mode
• WL.LAN Signal
• WL.LAN Defaults
• Print Area
• Key Repeat
• Menu Protect
• Series Prnt.Job
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
137
Maintenance Menu Parameters
Menu
Color Regist.
Description
You can adjust the color alignment for each color (black, cyan, magenta, yellow)
Reference
For more information about how to registration, see "Adjusting the
Color Registration" in the Maintenance Guide.
Image Density
❖ Prt. Test Sheet
You can print the registration test sheet.
❖ Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
You can specify per color the image density in the range of -10 to +10.
❖ Reset→
→Defaults
This function returns settings to their default values.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
138
Menu
Registration
Description
❖ Prt. Test Sheet
You can print the registration test sheet.
Tray 2, Tray 3, Duplex.BackSide
❖ Adjustment
You can select the start position for printing on page.
Horiz.: Tray 2, Horiz.: Tray 3, Horiz.:Dup.Back
-15 to +15 (by 1)
One step is 1/300 inch (0.8 mm)
Note
❒ The registration values are not default.
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
PlainPaper Type
You can select the type of plain paper you wish to use as a default.
❖ Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Bypass Tray
Maint. Reset
•
Thin
•
Normal
Maintenance Reset allows the user to reset each internal unit counters such as the
Transfer Belt and Fusing Unit. These counters can be reset at anytime, but are
necessary at the time of unit reinstallation.
For more information, see "Replacing Consumables" in the Maintenance Guide.
HDD Format
You can format the Printer Hard Disk.
Available when the optional Printer Hard Disk is installed.
Reference
For more information about formatting the Printer Hard Disk, see
"Printer Hard Disk Type 3000" in the Option Setup Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
139
Menu
Description
ROM Update
This menu is not currently used.
4C.Graphic Mode
This setting adjusts how much each color of toner overlaps when printing. If
characters or lines are blurred, selecting [Text Priority] may make them clearer.
Select [Photo Priority] for normal use.
Note
❒ Default:Photo Priority
WL.LAN Signal
You can check the signal strength when using the wireless LAN.
Reference
For more information about displaying the signal strength. See
p.144 “Displaying the Signal Strength”.
WL.LAN Defaults
You can reset the wireless LAN settings to the default.
Print Area
You can extend the printable area by about 2.5 mm (0.01 inch).
•
Normal
•
Enlarge Area
Note
❒ Default:Normal
Key Repeat
The default setting [On] enables the user to scroll through menu items and settings by holding the key down continuously, the [Off] setting requires the user to
press the key for each Cursor/Scroll movement.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
140
Menu
Menu Protect *1
Description
This procedure lets you protect menu settings against accidental changes. It
makes it impossible to change the menu settings you make with the normal procedure unless you perform the required key operation. In a network environment,
protecting settings restricts changes to menu settings to network administrators.
•
Level 1
•
Level 2
•
Off
Note
❒ While the printer is On Line, press the {Enter #}
} key, and then press
the {Escape}
} key, finally press the {Menu}
} key. You can access the
"Menu Protect" menu on the panel display.
❒ You can protect the "Maintenance", "System ", "Host Interface"
and "Language" menu on Level 1.
❒ You can protect the "Paper Input", "Maintenance", "System ",
"Host Interface" and "Language" menu on Level 2.
Series Prnt.Job *1
You can print series of print jobs without time intervals between them when jobs
are sent from the same computer, PDL, and interface.
Note
❒ Default: On
❒ When the Job Reset key is pressed, all jobs sent to the machine
will be canceled.
*1
While the printer is On Line, press the {Enter #}
} key, and then press the {Escape}
} key. Finally, press the
} key. You can access the "Menu Protect", and "Series Prnt.Job" menu on the panel display.
{Menu}
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
141
Changing the Maintenance Menu
Protecting the menus
A Check if the On Line indicator is on. If not, press the {On Line}} key to enter the "Ready" condition.
B Press the {Enter #}} key, then the {Escape}} key, and then the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS060E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
142
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the "Maintenance" menu, and then press the {Enter #}}
key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Menu Protect".
Maintenance:
Menu Protect
E Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Menu Protect:
*Off
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select the levels desired, and then press the {Enter #}} key. Wait
for two seconds.
"Maintenance" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
143
G Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Removing Protect
A Check if the On Line indicator is on. If not, press the {On Line}} key to enter the "Ready" condition.
B Press the {Enter #}} key, then the {Escape}} key, and then the {Menu}} key.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
144
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Maintenance" menu, and then press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Menu Protect", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Off", and then press the {Enter #}} key. Wait for two seconds.
"Maintenance" appears on the panel display.
F Press the {On Line}} key.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Displaying the Signal Strength
If you need to check the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) signal, select "WL.LAN Signal" in the "Maintenance" menu.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display the “Maintenance” menu.
Menu:
Maintenance
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
145
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
D Press the {T} or {U} key to display "WL.LAN Signal".
Maintenance:
WL.LAN Signal
E Press the {Enter #}} key.
One of the following messages appears on the panel display.
WL.LAN Signal
Good
100%
WL.LAN Signal
Fair
50%
WL.LAN Signal
Poor
30%
WL.LAN Signal
Unavailable 18%
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
146
Note
❒ If "WL.LAN Signal" is not displayed, "IEEE 802.11b" has not been selected for "LAN Type" in
"Network Setup" of the Host Interface menu. Select "IEEE 802.11b" for "LAN Type", and then
check the "WL.LAN Signal" in the Maintenance menu again.
❒ If "802.11 Ad hoc" or "Ad hoc" in "Comm. Mode" of "IEEE 802.11b" in the Host Interface menu
is selected, you cannot check the signal. Select "Infrastructure" and then check it again.
❒ Every time you press the {Enter #}
} key, the signal is updated.
❒ The signal is indicated as "Good" if the signal strength is 76-100%, "Fair" if the strength is 4175%, "Poor" if the strength is 21-40%, and "Unavailable" if the strength is 0-20%. If the signal is
unstable or unavailable, remove obstacles or move the printer to a place where the signal can
be received.
❒ Using wireless devices or microwave sources near the printer might affect the signal.
F Press the {Escape}} key.
G Press the {On Line}} key.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
147
Resetting the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Settings
If you need to reset the wireless LAN setting, select "WL.LAN Defaults" in the Maintenance menu.
Note
❒ The five items that can be reset in "IEEE 802.11b" of the Host Interface menu are "Comm. Mode",
"Channel", "Trans. Speed", " WEP Setting ", and "SSID".
A Press the {Menu}} key.
“Menu” appears on the panel display.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display the “Maintenance” menu.
Menu:
Maintenance
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Maintenance:
Color Regist.
D Press the {T} or {U} key to display "WL.LAN Defaults".
Maintenance:
WL.LAN Defaults
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
148
E Press the {Enter #}} key.
WL.LAN Defaults
Reset→Defaults
F Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Defaults reset
The wireless LAN setting value is reset.
“Ready” appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
149
System Menu
There are 14 menu items in the "System " menu.
• MisfeedRecovery
• Prt. Err Report
• Auto Continue
• Memory Overflow
• Copies
• Printer Lang.
• Sub Paper Size
• Page Size
• Duplex
• Energy Saver 1
• E. Saver2 Timer
• Unit of Measure
• Resolution
• B&W Page Detect
• Spool Printing
• Letterhead Mode
• E.Saver2 OnOff
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
150
System Parameters
Menu
MisfeedRecovery
Description
You can select whether Misfeed Recovery is enabled. When it is on, printing restarts after the misfed paper has been cleared.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: On
Prt. Err Report
You can select whether or not to have an error report printed when a printer error
or memory error occurs.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
151
Menu
Auto Continue
Description
You can set whether Auto Continue is enabled. When it is on, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
•
Off
•
0 minutes
•
1 minute
•
5 minutes
•
10 minutes
•
15 minutes
Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ When it is on, and certain types of error occur, the current job might
be canceled, and the machine automatically resumes the next job.
Memory Overflow
You can select whether the memory overflow error report should be printed.
•
Not Print
•
Error Report
Note
❒ Default: Not Print
Printer Lang.
You can specify how many pages to print.
This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print has been specified with the
printer driver or a command.
•
1-999
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
152
Menu
Printer Lang.
Description
You can specify the printer language.
•
Auto Detect
•
PCL
•
PS
Note
❒ Default: Auto Detect
Sub Paper Size
You can enable the Sub Paper Size feature. When you select "Auto ", the printer
substitutes the paper of a certain size which is to be an alternative if the paper currently specified is not loaded. When you select "Off", the printer uses the paper
in the current specified paper input tray regardless of its size.
•
Auto
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
Page Size
You can specify the default paper size.
8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13,
A4, B5, A5, A6, 16K, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2, 3 7/8 x7 1/2, C5 Env(162x229), C6
Env(114x162), DL Env(110x220), Custom Size
Note
❒ Default:
•
Metric: A4
•
Inch: 8 1/2 x 11
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
153
Menu
Duplex
Description
You can select whether you want to print on both sides of each page.
•
Off
•
Short Edge Bind
•
Long Edge Bind
Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ This menu appears only when the optional AD440 is installed.
Energy Saver 1
You can set On/Off for the Energy Save Mode level 1. This is Preheat mode.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: On
❒ When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator turns off, while the On Line indicator stays on.
E. Saver2 Timer
You can set how many minutes the printer waits before switching to Energy Saver mode. Energy Saver mode reduces electric power consumption.
5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes.
Note
❒ Default: 60 minutes
❒ When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator turns off, while the On Line indicator stays on and "Energy
Save Mode" is displayed on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
154
Menu
Unit of Measure
Description
You can select "mm" or "inch" for the custom paper size.
Note
❒ Default: mm (Metric version), inch (Inch version)
Resolution
You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.
❖ PCL
300 x 300 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
❖ PS3
600 x 600 dpi, 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi
Note
❒ Default: PCL 600 x 600 dpi, PS3 600 x 600 dpi
B&W Page Detect
You can specify whether the Black & White Page Detect feature is enabled.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: On
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
155
Menu
Spool Printing
Description
You can select whether all of the print data is spooled to the Printer Hard Disk
before printing.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ Spooling stores the print job sent by a computer temporarily in the
printer, transfers the print job, and then prints it.
❒ This menu appears Only when the optional Printer Hard Disk is installed.
Letterhead Mode *1
You can select the letterhead printing mode.
•
Off
•
Auto Detect
Note
❒ Default: Off
E.Saver2 OnOff *1
You can set On/Off for the Energy Save Mode level 2.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: On
*1
While the printer is On Line, press the {Enter #}
} key, and then press the {Escape}
} key. Finally, press the
} key. You can access the "Letterhead Mode", "E.Saver2 OnOff" menu on the panel display.
{Menu}
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
156
Changing the System Menu
The following example describes how to change the settings for "E. Saver2 Timer".
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display "System ".
Menu:
System
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
157
C Press {Enter #}}.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on the panel display.
System :
MisfeedRecovery
D Press {U} or {T} to display "E. Saver2 Timer", and then press {Enter #}}.
System :
E. Saver2 Timer
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
158
E Press {U} or {T} to select how many minutes the printer waits before switching to Energy
Saver mode.
The following message appears on the panel display.
E. Saver2 Timer
*30 minutes
F Press {Enter #}}. Wait for two seconds.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
G Press {On Line}}.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
159
Host Interface Menu
There are 6 menu items in the "Host Interface" menu.
• I/O Buffer
• I/O Timeout
• Network Setup
• IEEE 1394 Setup
• IEEE 802.11b
• USB Setting
Note
❒ For more information about the "Network Setup", see "Configuring the printer for the Network" in the
Quick Installation Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
160
Host Interface Parameters
Menu
I/O Buffer
Description
You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this
setting.
128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB
Note
❒ Default: 128 KB
I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer should wait before ending a print job.
If data from another port often appears in the middle of the print job, you should
increase the timeout value.
10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 60 seconds
Note
❒ Default: 15 seconds
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
161
Menu
Network Setup
Description
❖ DHCP
You can set how the Network Interface Board acquires TCP/IP settings.
Note
❒ Default: On
Reference
See "Configuring the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ IP Address
You can set the IP address.
Limitation
❒ When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want
to change the setting, Make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult
the network administrator for information about how to make
the setting for the network.
Note
❒ Default: All zero
Reference
See "Configuring the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
162
Menu
Description
❖ Subnet Mask
You can set the Subnet mask.
Limitation
❒ When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want
to change the setting, Make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult
the network administrator for information about how to make
the setting for the network.
Note
❒ Default: All zero
Reference
See "Configuring the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ Gateway Address
You can set the gateway address.
Limitation
❒ When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want
to change the setting, Make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult
the network administrator for information about how to make
the setting for the network.
Note
❒ Default: All zero
Reference
See "Configuring the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
163
Menu
Description
❖ Frame Type (NW)
You can set the Frame type for NetWare.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
❖ Active Protocol
You can set the active protocol.
TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
Note
❒ Default: All Active
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
164
Menu
Description
❖ Ethernet
You can select the speed of the network that the printer is connected to.
Auto , 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps
Note
❒ Default: Auto
Reference
See "Configuring the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ LAN Type
You can select Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b for the LAN Type.
Note
❒ Default: Ethernet
❒ Appears Only when the optional 802.11b Interface Unit is installed.
Reference
For more information about Network Setup, see "Configuring
the Printer for the Network" in the Quick Installation Guide.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
165
Menu
IEEE 1394 Setup *1
Description
You can make settings for using IEEE 1394. This menu appears only when the
optional IEEE 1394 board is installed.
❖ IP Address1394
You can set the IP address for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
Note
❒ Default: All zero
❖ Subnet Mask1394
You can set the Subnet Mask for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
Note
❒ Default: All zero
❖ IP over 1394
You can activate IP over 1394.
Note
❒ Default: Active
❖ SCSI print
You can activate SCSI print.
Note
❒ Default: Active
❖ Bidi-SCSI print
You can activate bidirectional transmission for SCSI print.
Note
❒ Default: On
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
166
Menu
IEEE 802.11b *2
Description
You can make settings for using the wireless LAN. This menu appears only when
the optional 802.11b Interface Unit is installed.
❖ Comm. Mode
You can set the transmission mode for IEEE 802.11b.
Note
❒ Default: 802.11 Ad hoc
❖ Channel
The selectable channels are 1-11 (Inch version) and 1-13 (Metric version).
Note
❒ Default: 11
❖ Trans. Speed
You can set the transmission speed for IEEE 802.11b.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
167
Menu
Description
❖ SSID
You can set for SSID in Infrastructure mode and 802.11 Ad hoc mode.
Limitation
❒ Select "¥" if you want to enter "/" in the SSID. Also, "¥" appears
when printing the configuration page, read it as "/".
Note
❒ The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32
bytes).
❒ A SSID value is set automatically to the nearest access point if
the setting has not been made.
❒ If the setting has not been made for 802.11 Ad hoc mode, the
same value as for Infrastructure mode or an "ASSID" value is
set automatically.
❖ WEP Setting
You can set the code for IEEE 802.11b.
Note
❒ Default: Not Active
❒ With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimal. With a
128-bit WEP, you can use 26 digit hexadecimal.
USB Setting
You can set the transmission speed for USB.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
*1
*2
Appears only when the optional 1394 Interface Unit is installed.
Appears only when the optional 802.11b Interface Unit is installed.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
168
Changing the Host Interface Menu
The following example describes how to change the setting for "I/O Timeout".
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display the "Host Interface" menu.
Menu:
Host Interface
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
169
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on the panel display.
Host Interface:
I/O Buffer
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display "I/O Timeout".
Host Interface:
I/O Timeout
E Press the {Enter #}} key.
The following message appears on the panel display.
I/O Timeout:
*15 seconds
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
170
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select how many minutes the printer waits before ending a print
job.
G Press the {Enter #}} key. Wait for two seconds.
"Host Interface" appears on the panel display.
H Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
171
PCL Menu
There are 9 menu items in the "PCL Menu".
• Orientation
• Form Lines
• Font Source
• Font Number
• Point Size
• Font Pitch
• Symbol Set
• Ext. A4 Width
• Append CR to LF
PCL Parameters
Menu
Orientation
Description
You can set the page orientation.
•
Portrait
•
Landscape
Note
❒ Default: Portrait
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
172
Menu
Form Lines
Description
You can set the number of lines per page.
5-128
Note
❒ Default: 64 (Metric version), 60 (Inch version)
Font Source
You can set the location of the default font.
•
Resident
•
RAM
•
HDD
Note
❒ Default: Resident
❒ When you select "RAM", you can select only fonts downloaded to
the printer RAM.
Font Number
You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
•
0 to 50 (for Resident)
•
0 to 44 (for RAM)
•
1 to 32767 (for HDD)
Note
❒ Default: 0
Point Size
You can set the point size you want to use for the default font.
4 to 999.75 by 0.25
Note
❒ Default: 12.00 points
❒ This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
173
Menu
Font Pitch
Description
You can set the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font.
0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
Note
❒ Default: 10.00 pitch
❒ This setting is effective only for a fixed-space font.
Symbol Set
You can specify the set of print characters for the default font. The available options are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK,
Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO
21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
Note
❒ Default: Roman-8
Ext. A4 Width
You can extend the width of the printable area for an A4 sheet leaving a narrow
margin on the sides.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
Append CR to LF
By adding a CR code to each LF code, you can print text data clearly.
•
On
•
Off
Note
❒ Default: Off
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
174
Changing the PCL Menu
The following example describes how to change the setting for "Orientation".
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
175
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "PCL Menu", and then press the {Enter #}} key.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on the panel display.
PCL Menu:
Orientation
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
Orientation:
*Portrait
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select the orientation desired, and then press the {Enter #}} key.
Wait for two seconds.
"PCL Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
176
E Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
177
Language Menu
You can select the languages you use. Available language are as follows:
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Portuguese,
Czech, Polish and Hungarian.
Note
❒ Default: English
Changing the Language Menu
You can change the language by the following procedures.
A Press the {Menu}} key.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
178
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display "Language".
Menu:
Language
C Press the {Enter #}} key.
ZHBS040E
The following message appears on the panel display.
Language:
*English
D Press the {U} or {T} key until the language you want to select appears on the panel display.
E Press the {Enter #}} key. Wait for two seconds.
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
179
F Press the {On Line}} key.
ZHBS050E
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
9. Appendix
SNMP
The Network Interface Board functions as a SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent using the UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.
The factory default community names are "public" and "admin". You can get MIB information using
these community names.
Reference
You can configure SNMP from the command line using telnet. See p.191 “SNMP”.
You can configure SNMP from SmartNetMonitor for Admin using the NIB Setup Tool. See Help for
SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
You can configure SNMP from your Web browser. See Help on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
❒ The optional 1394 Interface Unit supports TCP/IP only.
❒ The kinds of supported MIBs differ depending on the printer.
❖ Supported MIBs
•
•
•
•
MIB-II
PrinterMIB
HostResourceMIB
RicohPrivateMIB
180
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
181
Spool Printing
With Spool Printing, the whole data of a print job is saved in the Printer Hard Disk before printing. To
use this function, set it from the menu. See p.149 “System Menu”.
Important
❒ Do not turn off the printer or the computer when a print job is being spooled and the Data In indicator
is blinking. If you do, the print job will remain in the Printer Hard Disk and be printed when the printer
is turned on.
Limitation
❒ Spool Printing does not appear unless the optional Printer Hard Disk is installed.
❒ Data that has been received in the protocol other than LPD or IPP cannot be spooled.
❒ Up to 50 jobs (approximately 1000 MB) can be spooled at a time.
❒ When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500 MB.
❒ When sending spooled print jobs from more than one computer at the same time, up to five LPR
jobs and one IPP job can be spooled. Jobs exceeding the maximum number cannot be spooled.
Wait until the number of spooled print jobs falls below the maximum.
Note
❒ When "On" is selected, the first print will take time.
Note
❒ Spool jobs stored in the machine can be viewed or deleted using a Web browser.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
182
- Viewing/Deleting spool jobs in a Web browser
Launch the Web browser and enter the machine's IP address in the address bar. This displays the top
page.
Example : http://192.168.0.10
(In this example, the IP address of the machine is 192.168.0.10)
Click “Admin Info”, and then “Spool Printing Job List (Printer)” to display the spool jobs. To delete,
check the box next to the name of the file you want to delete. Enter the password *1 , and then click
[Delete]. For more information, see p.103 “Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings”.
*1
The default password is “password”.
- Setting Spool Printing
Spool Printing can be set using telnet or a Web browser.
• Using a Web browser
Click ”Configuration”, and then “General”. Set “Spool Printing”to “Enable”.
• Using telnet
Enter “spoolsw spool on” to set Spool Printing.
Reference
For more information about how to set up the spool printing, see the Help file.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
183
Remote Maintenance by telnet
You can view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board using telnet.
Note
❒ You should specify a password so that only the network administrator, or a person having network
administrator privileges, can use remote maintenance.
Using telnet
The following is a sample procedure in using telnet.
Limitation
❒ Only one person at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance.
A Use the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet.
% telnet IP_address
Note
❒ In order to use the host name instead of the IP address, you must write it to the "/etc/hosts" file.
B Type the password.
Note
❒ The factory default is "password".
C Type a command.
Reference
For more information about telnet commands, see p.184 “Commands List”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
184
D Exit telnet.
msh> logout
When the configuration is changed, a confirmation message requests whether or not the changes
should be saved.
E Type "yes" to save the changes, and then press {Enter}}.
If you do not want to save the changes, type "no", and then press {Enter}
}. If you want to make additional changes, type "return" at the command line, and then press {Enter}
}.
Note
❒ If the "Can not write NVRAM information" message appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat
the steps above.
❒ The Network Interface Board is reset automatically when the settings are changed.
❒ When the Network Interface Board is reset, the active print job which has already been sent to
the printer will finish printing. However, jobs that have not been sent yet will be canceled.
Commands List
This is a list of commands that can be used via remote maintenance.
Note
❒ Type "help" to see a list of commands that can be used.
msh> help
❒ Type "help command_name" to display information about the syntax of that command.
msh> help command_name
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
185
TCP/IP address
Use the ifconfig command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default
gateway address) for the machine.
❖ Reference
msh> ifconfig
❖ Configuration
msh> ifconfig interface_name parameter address
Interface name
Interface to be configured
ether
Ethernet Interface *1
naf0
ip1394 *2
fwip0
wlan *3
wi0
*1
*2
*3
IEEE 1394 Interface
*2
IEEE 802.11b Interface
*3
If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet interface.
Available when the optional 1394 Interface Unit is installed.
You can specify an interface when installing the optional 802.11b Interface Unit.
Parameter
Meaning
(no parameter)
IP address
netmask
subnet mask
broadcast
broadcast address
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
186
❖ Changing the Interface
You can specify either the LAN interface or IEEE 802.11b interface when using the optional
802.11b Interface Unit.
msh> ifconfig interface up
Note
❒ You cannot specify the IEEE 1394 interface.
The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16
The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0
Note
❒ This affects the configuration of the Network Interface Board of the IP address that is used.
❒ The TCP/IP setting is the same as that for the LAN interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.
❒ To type an address using hexadecimal, prefix it by “0x”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
187
- Address
❖ Subnet Mask
A number used to mathematically “mask” or hide the IP address on the network by eliminating those
parts of the address that are alike for all the machines on the network.
Note
❒ To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.
❒ The subnet mask is the same as that for the LAN interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.
❒ When installing the optional 1394 Interface Unit, set the subnet so that it does not overlap with the
LAN interface or the IEEE 1394 interface.
Access Control
Use the access command to view and configure access control. You can also specify two or more access
ranges.
❖ Reference
msh> access
❖ Configuration
msh> access ✩ range start-address end-address
• ✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered and
selected.)
Example: To specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and 192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
188
Note
❒ The access range restricts the workstations from which printing is possible by means of an address. If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting “0.0.0.0”.
❒ The entry is invalid if the start address is greater than the end address.
❒ Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target number is omitted.
❒ When using a Web browser, telnet or SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin, you can use an IP address that has not been restricted by access control.
❖ Access Control Initialization
msh> access flush
Note
❒ This restores the factory-default settings so that all access ranges become "0.0.0.0".
DHCP
Use the set command to configure the boot method.
msh> set parameter {on|off}
"on" means active and "off" means inactive.
Parameter
Meaning
dhcp
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Note
❒ The default is "on".
❒ When you use DHCP, the server also needs to be configured.
❒ DHCP takes precedence over all other settings.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
189
Protocol
Use the set command to allow/prevent remote access for each protocol.
msh> set protocol {up | down}
Protocol
appletalk
tcpip
“up” means active and “down” means inactive.
netware
netbeui
scsiprint *1
ip1394 *1
lpr
ftp
rsh
diprint
web
snmp
ipp
*1
Available when the optional 1394 Interface Unit is installed.
Note
❒ If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then log out, you cannot use remote access. If this
was a mistake, you can use the control panel to allow access by TCP/IP.
❒ When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint,
web, snmp and ipp.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
190
Printer status
The following commands can be used to get information about the current status of the printer.
msh> command
Command
Information that is displayed
status
Status of printer.
Information about the print jobs.
info
Information about the paper tray, output tray, and
printer language.
prnlog [ID]
Lists the last 16 print jobs.
Note
❒ More information about any print job is displayed when the ID number is added after the prnlog command.
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with these commands, see p.212 “Understanding the Displayed Information”.
Network Interface Board configuration settings information
Use the show command to display the Network Interface Board configuration settings.
msh> show [-p]
Note
❒ Add "-p" to the show command to have information displayed on screen at one time.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
191
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with this command, see p.214 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”.
System log information
Use the syslog command to display information stored in the printer's system log.
msh> syslog
Reference
For more information about the displayed information, see p.219 “System Log Information”.
SNMP
Use the snmp command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name.
Note
❒ You can configure from ten SNMP access settings numbered 1–10.
❒ Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows:
Number
1
2
Community name
public
admin
IP address
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Access type
read-only
read-write
trap off
trap off
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
192
❖ Display
Shows the SNMP information and available protocols.
msh> snmp ?
msh> snmp [-p] [registered_number]
Note
❒ If the -p option is added, you can view the settings one by one.
❒ Omitting the number displays all access settings.
❖ Community name configuration
You can set the community name of the Network Interface Board.
msh> snmp number name community_name
Note
❒ The community name must be within 15 characters.
❖ Access type configuration
You can select the access type from those listed below.
msh> snmp number type access_type
Access type
Type of access which is permitted
read
Read only
write
Read and write
trap
User is notified of trap messages.
no
All access is denied.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
193
❖ Protocol configuration
You should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inactive. If you set a protocol
to inactive, all access settings set to use that protocol are disabled.
msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}
• "on" means active and "off" means inactive
To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command. However, if you disabled a
protocol with the above command, making it active here will have no effect.
msh> snmp number active {ip | ipx} {on | off}
❖ Access configuration
You can configure an address of a host depending on the protocols used.
The Network Interface Board accepts requests only from hosts having addresses with access types
of "read-only" or "read-write". Type "0" to have Network Interface Board accept requests from any
host without requiring a specific type of access.
Command syntax:
msh> snmp number {ip | ipx} address
Note
❒ To specify the TCP/IP protocol, type ip followed by a space, and then the IP address.
❒ To specify the IPX/SPX protocol, type ipx followed by a space and then the IPX address followed
by a decimal and then the MAC address of the Network Interface Board.
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IP address
192.168.15.16.
msh> snmp 3 ip 192.168.15.16
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IPX address
7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65.
msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A448:000074625C65
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
194
IPP
Use the ipp command to configure the IPP settings.
❖ Viewing setting
The following command displays the current IPP settings.
msh> ipp
Example output:
timeout=900(sec)
auth basic
• The "timeout" setting specifies how many seconds the computer keeps trying to access the network printer to send print jobs when no connection could be made.
• The "auth" setting indicates the user authorization mode.
❖ IPP timeout configuration
Specifies how many seconds to wait before canceling a print job if it has been interrupted for some
reason. The range of time can be changed between 30 to 65535 seconds.
msh> ipp timeout {30 -65535}
❖ IPP user authorization configuration
Use the IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The factory default is "off" .
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
• The setting of user authorization are "basic" and "digest".
• Use "off" to remove a user's authorization.
Note
❒ If you select "basic" or "digest", see next section "Configuring IPP user authorization" for more
information about how to configure the user name.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
195
❖ Configuring IPP user authorization
Use the following command:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears.
msh> Input user number (1 to 10):
Type the number, user name and password.
msh> IPP user name:user1 msh> IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears.
User configuration changed.
SPRINT
To make setting for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), use the sprint command.
❖ View settings
The IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are displayed.
msh> sprint
❖ Bidirectional configuration for the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)
Use this setting to configure whether the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) is bidirectional.
The factory default is "on".
msh> sprint bidi [on/off]
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
196
Direct Printing Port
The direct printing port allows printing directly from a computer, connected to the network, to the printer.
Use the diprint command to change the direct printing port settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current direct printing port settings.
msh> diprint
Example output:
port 9100
timeout=300(sec)
bidirect off
• The “Port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.
• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional.
❖ Setting timeout
You can specify the timeout interval to use when receiving data from the network.
msh> diprint [0~65535]
Note
❒ The factory default is 300 seconds.
❒ If 0 is set, timeout is disabled.
❖ Bidirectional configuration for the direct printing port
Use this setting to configure whether the direct printing port is bidirectional.
The factory default is “off”.
msh> diprint bidirect {on|off}
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
197
SMB
Use the smb command to configure or delete the computer name or workgroup name for NetBEUI.
msh >smb parameter
Parameter
Settings
smb comp
Your computer name consisting of up to 13 characters
smb group
Workgroup name consisting of up to 15 characters
smb comment
Comment consisting of up to 31 characters
smb clear comp
Clears complete name
smb clear group
Clears Workgroup name
smb clear comment
Clears comment
ROUTE
Use the route command to control the routing table.
This command allows you to configure and display routing information. You can change the network
configuration from a remote computer using this command.
Note
❒ The maximum number of routing tables are 16.
Parameter
Topics of setting
route add {host | net} destination
gateway
Adds a host/network route to "destination", and a gateway address to "gateway"
in the table. Host becomes the default setting.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
198
Parameter
Topics of setting
route delete {host | net} destination
Deletes a host/network route from the table. Host becomes the default setting.
route get {destination}
Displays only route information corresponding to a specified destination. When
the destination is unspecified, all routing information is displayed.
route active {host | net} destination *1 on/off
You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default setting.
route add default gateway *1
You can set the default gateway address.
route flush
Deletes all routing information.
*1
IP address
SLP
Use this command to configure SLP settings.
You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of NetWare 5. Using the slp
command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by SLP multi-cast-packet.
Note
❒ The default value of TTL is "1". A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does
not support multi-cast, the settings are not available even if the TTL value is increased.
❒ The acceptable TTL value is 1 - 255.
msh> slp ttl {1 -255}
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
199
Setting IEEE 802.11b
To make setting for IEEE 802.11b, use the wiconfig command.
Limitation
❒ You can make settings when installing the optional 802.11b Interface Unit.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current IEEE 802.11b settings.
msh> wiconfig
The IEEE 802.11b card information is displayed.
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
Note
❒ If the IEEE 802.11b interface is not working correctly, the IEEE 802.11b card information is not
displayed.
❖ Configuration
msh> wiconfig parameter
Parameter
Value to be configured
mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc]
You can set infrastructure mode (ap) , 802.11 ad hoc
mode(802.11adhoc) or ad hoc mode (adhoc).
The default is ad hoc mode.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
200
Parameter
Value to be configured
ssid ID value
You can set for SSID in infrastructure mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e
(32 bytes).
A SSID value is set automatically to the nearest access
point if the setting has not been made.
If the setting has not been made for ad hoc mode, the
same value as for infrastructure mode or an "ASSID"
value is set automatically if the setting has not been
made.
channel frequency channel no.
You can set the channel.
You can specify from following channel.
•
Metric Version :1-13
•
Inch Version :1-11
Set the same channel for all the machines you are using.
enc [on|off]
You can enable or disable the WEP function. To enable
the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable it, specify
[off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct WEP key.
key [key value]
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimal.
With a 128-bit WEP, you can use 26 digit hexadecimal.
To use this function, set the same WEP key for all the
ports that transmit to each other.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
201
Parameter
Value to be configured
auth [open|shared]
You can set the authorized mode when using WEP. The
specified value and the authorized mode are as follows:
open: Open system authorized (default)
shared: Shared key authorized
rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m]
You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed.
The transmitting speed you specify here is the speed at
which data is sent. You can receive data at any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
11m: 11 Mbps fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
2m: 2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
WINS
Use the wins command to configure the WINS server settings
For more information about WINS server settings, see p.233 “Configuring a WINS Server”.
❖ Configuration
Use the set command to make WINS active or inactive.
msh> set wins {on|off}
• "on" means active and "off" means inactive.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
202
❖ Viewing setting
The following command displays the WINS server IP address.
msh> wins
Example out put:
wins: primary server 0.0.0.0 secondary server 0.0.0.0
Note
❒ If DHCP is used to start from the network, the current WINS server address is displayed. This
address, however, is not displayed if DHCP is not used.
❒ If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address, the DHCP address is
the valid address.
❖ Address configuration
Use this command to configure a WINS server IP address.
msh> wins {primary|secondary} IP_address
Note
❒ Use the "primary" to configure a primary WINS server IP address.
❒ Use the "secondary" to configure a secondary WINS server IP address.
AutoNet
Use the set command to configure Autonet.
Note
❒ For more information about Autonet, see p.232 “Using AutoNet”.
msh>set autonet {on|off}
Select "on" to activate Autonet, and "off" to deactivate it.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
203
Changing the Host Name
Use the hostname command to change the printer name.
msh> hostname [interface_name ] printer_name
interface name
Interface to be configured
ether
Ethernet interface *1
wlan
*2
ip1394 *3
*1
*2
*3
IEEE 802.11b interface
IEEE 1394 interface
If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet interface.
If you install the optional 802.11b Interface Unit, you can set the command.
If you install the optional 1394 Interface Unit, you can set the command.
Note
❒ Enter the printer name using up to 13 characters.
❒ You cannot use a printer name starting with RNP or rnp.
❒ The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer name.
SNTP
The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). To change the SNTP settings, use the sntp command.
Limitation
❒ SNTP supports the NTP servers running xnptd V3 and V4.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
204
❖ Reference
msh> sntp
❖ NTP Server Address Configuration
You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.
msh> sntp server IP_address
❖ Interval Configuration
You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server.
msh> sntp interval polling_time
Note
❒ The factory default setting is 3600 seconds.
❒ You can set the interval from 16 to 16384 seconds.
❒ If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you turn the printer on. After
that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server.
❖ Time-zone Configuration
You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and the NTP server clock.
msh> sntp timezone +/-hour_time
Example: To set the time-zone difference to +8 hours:
msh> sntp timezone +08:00
Note
❒ The time is in 24-hour notation.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
205
Changing the Password
Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password.
Important
❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.
Note
❒ The default factory password is "password".
A Type "passwd".
msh> passwd
B Type the current password.
Old password:
C Type the new password.
New password:
Note
❒ The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Upper and lower
case characters are considered unique. For example, R is different from r.
❒ The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the Network Interface Board using
a Web browse and that used in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a password from telnet, other
passwords are also changed.
D Type the new password once again.
Retype new password:
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
206
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Printer current status
You can check the printer's status using the telnet command.
❖ telnet
Use the status command.
Messages
Description
Add Toner: Cyan
The toner cartridge is empty.
Add Toner: Magenta
The toner cartridge is empty.
Add Toner: Yellow
The toner cartridge is empty.
Calibrating...
The printer is calibrating or the photoconductor unit is being supplied.
Color Regist Error
The color registration error has occurred.
Energy Save Mode
The printer is in Energy Saver Mode.
Hardware Problem Black PCU
The photoconductor unit is not set correctly.
Hardware Problem Bypass Tray
An error has occurred in the Bypass Tray.
Hardware Problem Color PCU
The photoconductor unit is not set correctly.
Hardware Problem DIMM
An error has occurred in the DIMM.
Hardware Problem Ethernet
An error has occurred in the Ethernet interface.
Hardware Problem HDD
An error has occurred in the optional Printer Hard Disk.
Hardware Problem IEEE1394
An error has occurred in the IEEE 1394 interface.
Hardware Problem NV-RAM
An error has occurred in the optional Account Enhance Unit.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
207
Messages
Description
Hardware Problem Option RAM
An error has occurred in the optional Memory Unit.
Hardware Problem Parallel I/F
An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Hardware Problem USB
An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Hardware Problem Wireless Board
An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) interface.
Hardware Problem Wireless Card
An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) card.
Hex Dump Mode
The printer is in Hex Dump Mode.
Offline
The printer is offline and cannot print data.
Please Wait
The printer is initializing the development unit.
The printer is initializing HDD.
Processing...
Print data is being processed.
Ready
Printing is available.
Replace Black PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace Color PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace Fusing Unit
It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Resetting Job...
Job is being reset.
Toner is Almost Empty: Black
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Toner is Almost Empty: Cyan
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Toner is Almost Empty: Magenta
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Toner is Almost Empty: Yellow
The toner cartridge is almost empty.
Waiting...
The printer is waiting for the next data to print.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
208
Messages
Description
Warming Up...
The printer is warming up.
Waste Toner is Almost Full
The waste toner is full.
Printer configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.
❖ telnet
Use the info command.
Note
❒ "*" (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting.
❒ Regarding *1 - *5, see the following table.
Item
Description
Input Tray
No.
ID number of the paper tray
Name
Name of the paper tray*1
PaperSize
Paper size loaded in the paper tray*2
Status
Current status of the paper tray*3
Output Tray
No.
ID number of the output tray
Name
Name of the output tray*4
Status
Current status of the output tray*5
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
209
Item
Description
Printer Language
No.
ID number of the printer language used by the printer
Name
Name of the printer language used in the printer
Version
Version of the printer language
❖ *1 Input Tray: Name
Name
Description
Tray X
Name of installed paper tray. (X is the number of tray.)
Bypass Tray
Bypass Tray
❖ *2 Input Tray: PaperSize
Paper Size
Description
A4 (210 × 297 mm)
A4 (210 × 297) K
B5JIS (182 × 257 mm)
B5 (182 × 257) K
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
A5 (148 × 210) K
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
A6 (105 × 148) K
8 1/2 × 14
LG (8 1/2 × 14) K
8 1/2 × 11
LT (8 1/2 × 11) K
5 1/2 × 8 1/2
5 1/2 × 8 1/2 K
Custom(XXXxYYY mm)
Custom Size
7 1/4 × 10 1/2
7 1/4 × 10 1/2 K
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
210
Paper Size
Description
8 1/4 × 13
8 1/4 × 13 K
8 1/2 × 13
8 1/2 × 13 K
4 1/8 × 9 1/2
4 1/8 × 9 1/2 K
3 7/8 × 7 1/2
3 7/8 × 7 1/2 K
DL (110 × 220 mm)
DL (110 × 220) K
C5 Env (162 × 229 mm)
C5 Env (162 × 229) K
8 × 13
8×13 K
C6 Env (114 × 162 mm)
C6 Env (114 × 162) K
8K (267 × 390 mm)
8K (267 × 390) K
16K (195 × 267 mm)
16K (195 × 267) K
NCS
There is no tray.
**
The paper size is not selected.
❖ *3 Input Tray: Status
Status
Description
Normal

NoTray
There is no paper tray
PaperEnd
There is no paper in the paper tray
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
211
❖ *4 Output Tray: Name
Name
Standard Tray
Description
Output Tray
❖ *5 Output Tray: Status
Status
Description
Normal
----
PaperExist
There is paper in the output tray
OverFlow
Output tray is full of paper
Error
Other errors
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
212
Understanding the Displayed Information
This section describes how to read the status information returned by the Network Interface Board.
Print Job Information
The status of the print job can be viewed using the following commands.
• telnet : Use the status command. See p.190 “Printer status” .
Item name
Meaning
Rank
Print job status.
•
Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
•
Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner
Print request user name.
Job
Print request number.
Files
The name of the document.
Total Size
The size of the data (spooled).
The default is “0 bytes”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
213
Print Log Information
This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs that have been printed.
This log can be displayed with the following commands.
• telnet : Use the prnlog command. See p.190 “Printer status” .
Name
Meaning
ID
Print request ID.
User
Print request user name.
Page
The number of pages that is printed.
Result
The result of the print request.
Time
The time when the print request was received
User ID *1
User ID that is to be configured in the printer driver.
JobName *1
The name of the document for printing.
*1
Appears the UserID and JobName information when entering the info command with the ID.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
214
Configuring the Network Interface Board
The Network Interface Board settings can be displayed by using the commands below.
• telnet : Use the show command. See p.190 “Network Interface Board configuration settings information” .
Item name
Meaning
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down
Up means active, Down means inactive.
AppleTalk
TCP/IP
NetWare
NetBEUI
IP over 1394 *1
*4
SCSI print *4
Ethernet interface
Syslog priority
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
Soft switch
Internal version number.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
215
Item name
Meaning
AppleTalk
Mode
AppleTalk protocol in selection.
Net
Network number.
Object
Macintosh printer name.
Type
The type of printer.
Zone
Name of the zone that the printer belongs to.
TCP/IP
Mode
Up means active, Down means inactive.
ftp
lpr
rsh
diprint
web
telnet
snmp
ipp
EncapType
Frame type.
dhcp
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (on/off)
Address
IP address.
Netmask
Subnet mask.
Broadcast
Broadcast address.
Gateway
Default gateway address.
Access Range[✩] *2
Access Control Range.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
216
Item name
Meaning
Primary WINS
Primary WINS server address.
Secondary WINS
Secondary WINS server address.
Time server
NTP server address
Time Zone
NTP server time difference
Time server polling time
Synchronizes interval
Home page URL
URL of homepage.
Home page link name
URL name of homepage.
Help page URL
URL of help page.
SNMP protocol
Protocol used with SNMP.
NetWare
EncapType
Frame type.
RPRINTER number
Remote printer number.
Print server name
Print server name.
File server name
Name of the connect file server.
Context name
Context of print server.
Switch
Mode
Active mode.
NDS/Bindery
(this value is fixed)
Packet negotiation
Print job timeout
Time of the job timeout.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
217
Item name
Meaning
NetBEUI
Switch
Mode
(this value is fixed)
Direct print
(this value is fixed)
Notification
Notification of print job completion.
Workgroup name
Name of the workgroup.
Computer name
Name of the computer.
Comment
Comment.
Share name[1]
IEEE 802.11b
Share name (name of the printer type).
*3
SSID
SSID being used.
Channel range
Channels available for use.
Channel
Channel being used.
Communication mode
IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode.
Rate
IEEE 802.11b interface speed.
WEP encryption
Whether WEP is enabled or disabled.
Auth
Validity or invalidity of the authorized mode setting when using
WEP.
Encryption key
WEP key.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
218
Item name
IP over 1394 *1
Meaning
*4
Device name
Address
IP address.
Netmask
Subnet mask.
Broadcast
Broadcast address.
SCSI print *4
Bidi.
Shell mode
*1
*2
*3
*4
Bidirectional setting (on/off).
Mode of the remote maintenance tool.
The optional 1394 Interface Unit supports TCP/IP only.
✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5.
You can display the item names when installing the optional the optional 802.11b Interface Unit.
You can display the item names when installing the optional 1394 Interface Unit.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
219
Message List
This is a list of messages written in the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the
syslog command.
System Log Information
You can use the following methods to view the system log.
• telnet : Use the syslog command. See p.184 “Commands List” .
Message
Description and Solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name> denied. Ei- (In print server mode) Cannot log in to the file server.
ther there is no account for this print server on the NetMake sure that the print server is registered on the file
Ware server or the password was incorrect.
server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it.
add_sess: community<community name> already defined. The same community name already exists. Use another
community name.
add_sess: session<community name>already defined.
A requested community name is not defined.
add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, community:
<community name>
The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when the community access type is TRAP. Specify the host IP address for
the TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPX address>, community: The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable
<community name>
when the community access type is TRAP. Specify the
host IPX address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community name> already
defined.
The same community name already exists. Use another
community name.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
220
Message
Description and Solutions
add_sess_ipx: session_ipx<community name> not defined. A requested community name is not defined.
ANONYMOUS FTP LOGIN FROM <IP address>,
<password>
An anonymous login has been made with a password
<password> from the host <IP address>.
anpd start. (AppleTalk)
An anpd (AppleTalk Network Package Daemon) has
started.
Attach FileServer =<file server name>
Attached to the file server as a nearest server.
Attach to print queue <print queue name>
(In print server mode) Attached to the print queue name.
Cannot create service connection
(In remote printer mode) Cannot establish a connection
with the file server. The number of file server users may
exceed the maximum number that the file server can handle.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server name>/<printer
number>)
The printer having the number displayed on the print
server does not exist. Make sure that the number of the
printer is registered in the print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server.
The IP address changes when DHCP LEASE is renewed.
To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
child process exec error! (process name)
Failed to start the network service. Turn the printer off
and then on. If this does not work, contact your service or
sales representatives.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server address>).
The IP address was successfully received from the DHCP
server.
connection from <IP address>
Logged on from the host <IP address>.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
221
Message
Description and Solutions
Could not attach to FileServer<error number>
(In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the file server.
For some reason, the file server refuses the connection.
Check the file server configuration.
Could not attach to PServer<print server>
(In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the print server.
For some reason, the print server refuses the connection.
Check the print server configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps
The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps).
Current IP address <current IP address>
The IP address <current IP address> was received from
the DHCP server.
Current IPX address<IPX address>
The current IPX address.
DHCP lease time expired.
DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address used up to now
becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found.
The DHCP server cannot be found. Make sure the DHCP
server is running on the network.
dhcpcd start.
A dhcpcd (DHCP client service) has started.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC address>).
The same IP address is used. An IP address must be
unique. Check the address of the device indicated in
<MAC address>.
Established SPX Connection with PServer,
(In remote printer mode) A connection with the print
server has been established.
(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID=
<connection ID>)
exiting
lpd service has ended and the system is exiting the process.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
222
Message
Description and Solutions
Exit pserver
(In print server mode) Exits the print server because the
necessary print server settings have not been made.
Frametype =<frame type name>
The <frame type name> is configured to be used on NetWare.
httpd start.
An httpd has started.
IEEE 802.11b Card Firmware REV.IEEE 802.11b Card
Firmware REV.
This is the wireless LAN card's firmware version.
IEEE 802.11b current channel <Channel>
The current channel is displayed.
The value chosen by the user is displayed in ad hoc mode.
The channel used in the access point is displayed in infrastructure mode.
(Example: Current channel is 11.)
IEEE 802.11b current channel 11
IEEE 802.11b MAC Address = <MAC Address>
The IEEE 802.11b I/F MAC address is displayed.
(Example: Current MAC address is
00:00:74:XX:XX:XX.)
IEEE 802.11b MAC Address =
00:00:74:XX:XX:XX
IEEE 802.11b SSID <ssid> (AP MAC Address < MAC
Address>)
The SSID of the access point used in infrastructure mode
and the MAC address of the access point are displayed.
(Example: Current MAC address is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
and SSID value is "test-ssid".)
IEEE 802.11b SSID test-ssid (AP MAC Address
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
223
Message
IEEE 802.11b <transmission mode> mode
IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate <Transfer Speed>
Description and Solutions
This is the IEEE 802.11b transmission mode.
•
IEEE 802.11b [infrastructure] mode : in infrastructure
mode
•
IEEE 802.11b [802.11 ad hoc] mode : in 802.11 adhoc
mode
•
IEEE 802.11b [ad hoc] mode : in adhoc mode
The IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed (set speed) is displayed.
(Example: Current Tx Rate is 11Mbps.)
IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate 11Mbps
inetd start.
An inetd has started.
<interface> started with IP: <IP address>
<IP address> has been set for <Interface> and <Interface> started.
<Interface>: Subnet overlap.
Subnet from Netmask and the IP address you tried to set
for <Interface> overlap the subnet for another interface.
Set Subnet so that it does not overlap with another interface.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied.
The printer could not authenticate the name of the user attempting to cancel a job.
ipp disable.
Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable.
Printing with ipp is enabled.
IPP job canceled. jobid=&percnt;d.
The spooled job has been canceled due to an error or by
user request.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
224
Message
Description and Solutions
job canceled. jobid=&percnt;d.
The spooled job has been canceled due to an error or by
user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), RenewTime=<renew time> The resource lease time that was received from the DHCP
(sec).
server is <lease time> in seconds. The renewal time is
also <renew time> in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name>
(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY>)
(In print server mode) Logged in to the file server with
NDS or BINDERY mode.
multid start.
Data transmission service for multiprotocols has started.
nbstart start. (NetBEUI)
The service for NetBEUI protocol stack setting has started.
NBT Registration Broadcast(<NetBIOS name>)
Use a local broadcast to map <NetBIOS name> with the
IP address.
nbtd start.
A nbtd (NetBIOS over TCP/IP Daemon) has started.
(Available only in DHCP mode)
NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer name>
The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as <computer
name>.
nmsd start. (NetBEUI)
A nmsd (Name Server Daemon) has started.
npriter start. (NetWare)
(In remote printer mode) NetWare service has started.
nwstart start. (NetWare)
The service for NetWare protocol stack setting has started.
Open log file <file name>
(In print server mode) The specified log file has been
opened.
papd start. (AppleTalk)
AppleTalk print service has started.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
225
Message
Description and Solutions
permission denied.
Job cancellation was determined to be unauthorized after
checking the user name and host address (except for
ROOT authorization).
phy release file open failed.
Replacing the Network Interface Board is required. Contact your sales or service representatives.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be serviced by
printer 0, <print server name>
(In print server mode) The print queue name cannot be
serviced. Make sure that print queue volume exists on the
specified file server.
Print server <print server name> has no printer.
(In print server mode) The printer object is not assigned
to the print server <print server name>. Using NWadmin,
assign the printer object, and then restart the printer device.
Print session full
Cannot accept the print session.
Printer <printer name> has no queue
(In print server mode) The print queue is not assigned to
the printer. Using NWadmin, assign the print queue to the
printer, and then restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare)
(In print server mode) NetWare service has started.
Required computer name (<Computer name>) is duplicated The same computer name is detected on the network. The
name
start job determines the computer name by adding the
computer name to the suffix (0,1....). Configure a new
computer name that is unique.
Required file server (<file server name>) not found
Cannot find the required file server.
restarted.
LPD has started.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
226
Message
Description and Solutions
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name> The SAP function has started. The SAP (SAP type and
SAP name) packet is issued to advertise the service on the
SAP table on the NetWare server.
Set context to <NDS context name>
A <NDS context name> has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service rebooting...
Rebooting the network service.
smbd start. (NetBEUI)
An smbd (SMB (Server Message Block) service) has
started.
Snmp over ip is ready.
Communication over TCP/IP with SNMP is available.
Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready.
Communication over IP over 1394 with SNMP is available.
Snmp over ipx is ready.
Communication over IPX with SNMP is available.
snmpd start.
SNMP service has started.
started.
Direct print service has started.
The print server received error <error number> during at- Cannot log in to the file server. The print server is not regtempt to log in to the network.Access to the network was istered or the password is specified. Register the print
denied.Verify that the print server name and password are server without specifying a password.
correct.
win2kspd protocol-DOWN (APPEXIT).
NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPEXIT) of device
SBP2TSP was set by protocol-DOWN.
SCSI print is not receiving data.
win2kspd protocol-UP (APPENTRY).
NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPENTRY) of device
SBP2TSP was set by protocol-UP.
SCSI print is not receiving data.
win2kspd started.
SCSI print (SBP-2) service has started.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
227
Message
Description and Solutions
WINS name refresh :Server No Response
There has been no response to the update request from the
server. Confirm that the WINS server address is correct
and the WINS server is working properly.
WINS name registration/refresh error code(errornumber) Set Net BIOS names those do not overlap with each other.
Confirm that the WINS server address is correct and the
WINS server is working properly.
WINS name registration:Server No Response
There has been no response to the registration request
from the server. Confirm that the WINS server address is
correct and the WINS server is working properly.
WINS server address0.0.0.0
The WINS server address has not been specified. Specify
the WINS server address to match the printer name with
WINS.
WINS Server=<WINS server address> NetBIOS
Name=<NetBIOS name>
The printer name has been successfully registered in
<WINS server address>.
WINS wrong scopeID
The scope ID is wrong.
Specify the correct scope ID.
write error occurred. (diskfull)
The hard disk became full while the spool file was being
written.
Wait until enough HDD space becomes available as
printing proceeds.
write error occurred. (fatal)
A fatal error occurred while the spool file was being written.
Turn the printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representative.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
228
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following when using the Network Interface Board. When configuration is
necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.
Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network
When the NetWare file server and the printer are on the opposite side of a router, packets are continuously sent back and forth, possibly causing communication charges to increase. Because the packet
transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the
network you are using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the printer.
Configuring the router
Filter the packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.
Note
❒ The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer configuration page. For
more information about printing a configuration page, see the Option Setup Guide that comes with
the printer.
❒ For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the instructions below.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
229
Configuring the printer with NetWare
A Follow the setup method in this manual, configure the file server.
B Set the Frame type for a NetWare environment.
Reference
For more information about selecting a Frame type, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol
using the Control Panel”.
Configuring the printer without NetWare
A While not printing, the Network Interface Board sends packets on the network. Set the NetWare to inactive.
Reference
For more information about selecting a protocol, see p.71 “Configuring the NetWare Protocol using the Control Panel”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
230
PostScript Printing from Windows
When printing PostScript from Windows, see the PostScript 3 Supplement.
NetWare Printing
Form Feed
You should not configure the form feed on NetWare. The form feed is controlled by the printer driver
on Windows. If the NetWare form feed is configured, the printer might not print properly. If you want
to change the form feed setting, always configure it on Windows.
• With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box under the [Printer Settings] tab in the
Printer Properties dialog box.
• With Windows 2000, clear the [Form feed] check box under the [NetWare Settings] tab in the Printer
Properties dialog box.
• With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box under the [NetWare Settings] tab in the Printer Properties dialog box.
Banner Page
You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the banner page setting,
always configure it on Windows.
• With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box under the [Printer Settings] tab in the
Printer Properties dialog box.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
231
• With Windows 2000, clear the [Enable banner] check box under the [NetWare Settings] tab in the
Printer Properties dialog box.
• With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box under the [NetWare Settings] tab in the
Printer Properties dialog box.
Printing after resetting the printer
After resetting the remote printer, it will be cut off from the print server for about 30-40 seconds before
connecting again. Due to the NetWare specification, print jobs may be accepted, but they will not be
printed during this interval.
When using the printer as a remote printer, wait about 2 minutes after resetting the printer before attempting to print.
Using DHCP
You can use the printer under a DHCP environment. You can also register the printer NetBIOS name
on a WINS server when it is running.
Limitation
❒ DHCP cannot be used with IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394). Set a fixed IP address with the control panel,
telnet or a Web browser.
•
See the Setup Guide.
•
See p.185 “TCP/IP address”.
•
See p.103 “Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings”.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
232
Note
❒ Printers that register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server must be configured for the WINS
server. See p.201 “WINS”.
❒ Supported DHCP server is Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, Windows 2000 Server
and NetWare 5.
❒ If you do not use the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the DHCP server so that the
same IP address is assigned every time.
❒ DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on a network via an ISDN line, it
will result in expensive line charges. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer.
Using AutoNet
If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting
with 169.254 which is not used on the network can be selected automatically by the printer.
Limitation
❒ You must change the setting to "on" to use AutoNet. See p.202 “AutoNet”.
Note
❒ The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority to that selected by AutoNet.
❒ You can confirm the current IP address on the configuration page. For more information about the
configuration page, see p.130 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS server.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
233
Configuring a WINS Server
The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when power is turned
on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from SmartNetMonitor for Admin
even under a DHCP environment.
This section describes how to configure the WINS server.
Note
❒ The WINS Server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, and Windows
2000 Servers WINS Manager.
❒ For more information about the WINS Server settings, see Windows Help.
❒ If there is no reply from the WINS Server, the NetBIOS name will be registered by broadcast.
❒ The NetBIOS name consists of up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
Using a Web browser
A Start the Web browser.
B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX substituting the Xs with the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.
C Click Network Config.
The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.
D Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the factory default account, enter no user name and type "password" for the password.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
234
E Click TCP/IP.
F Set WINS to active and enter the IP address of the WINS server in Primary WINS Server and
Secondary WINS Server.
G Click Refresh.
H Exit the Web browser.
Using telnet
A Connect to the remote printer using telnet.
B Use the set command to make WINS active.
msh> set wins on
C Specify the IP addresses (primary and secondary) using the following commands.
msh> wins primary Ipaddress
msh> wins secondary Ipaddress
Note
❒ To confirm the current configuration, use the show command.
D Log out from telnet.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
235
Memory Capacity and Paper Size
Non-Duplex Printing
Print Quality
Duplex Printing
Paper Size
Can be printed
Guaranteed
Can be printed
Guaranteed
A4
600×600 dpi *1
B5
64 MB (Standard)
64 MB (Standard)
LT
Legal
1200×600 dpi
*2
A4
B5
64 MB (Standard)
LT
64 MB
(Standard)
128 MB (Standard + 64 MB)
Legal
1200×1200 dpi *3
A4
B5
LT
64 MB
(Standard)
128 MB (Standard 128 MB (Standard 192 MB (Standard
+ 64 MB)
+ 64 MB)
+ 128 MB)
Legal
*1
To set resolution from each printer driver is as follows:
• RPCS: [600 x 600 dpi] on [Resolution]
• PCL 5c: [600 dpi] on [Resolution]
• PostScript 3: [600dpi] on [Resolution] and [Fast] on [Gradation]
Reference
For more information about how to set the printer driver, see printer driver's Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
236
*2
To set resolution from each printer driver is as follows:
• RPCS: [1200 x 600 dpi] on [Resolution]
• PostScript 3: [600dpi] on [Resolution] and [Standard] on [Gradation]
Reference
*3
For more information about how to set the printer driver, see printer driver's Help.
To set resolution from each printer driver is as follows:
• RPCS: [1200 x 1200dpi] on [Resolution]
• PostScript 3: [1200dpi] on [Resolution] and [Standard] on [Gradation]
Reference
For more information about how to set the printer driver, see printer driver's Help.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
237
Specifications
Mainframe
❖ Configuration:
Desktop
❖ Print Process:
Laser beam scanning & Electrophotographic printing
Mono component toner development
4 drums tandem method
❖ Printing Speed:
Monochrome: Maximum 20 pages per minute (A4K), Maximum 21 pages per minute (11×81/2K)
Color: Maximum 16 pages per minute (A4K), Maximum 17 pages per minute (11×81/2K
First print Speed: Pre Heat On (Default): 15.5 sec, Pre Heat Off: 25 sec or less
❖ Interface:
• Network Standard Model
Standard:
• Parallel (Bidirectional IEEE1284)
• Ethernet (10/100Base-TX)
• USB (USB1.1, USB2.0 *1 )
*1
It requires a USB computer port and cable that support USB 2.0.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
238
Optional:
• IEEE 1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394)
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• BluetoothTM
• Basic
Standard:
• Parallel (Bidirectional IEEE1284)
• USB (USB1.1, USB2.0 *1 )
*1
It requires a USB computer port and cable that support
Optional:
• Ethernet (10/100Base-TX)
• IEEE 1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394)
• IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
• BluetoothTM
❖ Resolution:
1200 × 1200 dpi (RPCS, PostScript 3)
1200 × 600 dpi (RPCS, PostScript 3)
600 × 600 dpi (PCL 5c, RPCS, PostScript 3)
300 × 300 dpi (PCL 5c *1 , RPCS)
*1
monochrome only
❖ Printer Language:
PCL 5c, RPCS, Adobe PostScript Level 3
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
239
❖ Fonts:
PCL 5c
Agfa Font 35 Manager Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, and 1 Bitmap font Agfa
Font Manager available, 31 fonts
PostScript 3
136 fonts
❖ Paper size:
See "Paper and Other Media" in the Maintenance Guide.
❖ Paper Weight:
See "Paper and Other Media" in the Maintenance Guide.
❖ Media Type:
See "Paper and Other Media" in the Maintenance Guide.
❖ Power Source:
220 - 240 V, 50/60Hz
❖ Power Consumption:
Printing
1300 W or less
Energy Saver
9 W or less
❖ Noise Emission *1 :
Sound Power Level
Mainframe only
During Printing
63 dB (A)
Stand-by
40 dB (A)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
240
Sound Pressure level *2
Mainframe only
Stand by
34 dB (A)
During Printing
45 dB (A)
*1
*2
The preceding measurements made in accordance with ISO7779 are actual values.
Measured at the position of a bystander.
❖ Dimensions:
Width
Printer only
(tray not extended)
419 mm (16.5 inches)
Depth
536 mm (21.1 inches)
❖ Weight:
Approximately 30 kg (66.1 lb) (toner cartridge and power cord included)
❖ Warm-up Time:
Less than 30 seconds (23°C, 73F) *1
*1 When no error.
❖ Paper Input Capacity:
Standard Paper Tray
530 sheet tray *1
Bypass Tray
100 sheet *2
Optional Paper Feed Units
530 sheet paper tray × 2 *1
*1
*2
Paper weight: 80 g/m2 (20 lb. bond)
You can load up to 10 envelopes at the same time.
Height
395 mm (15.5 inches)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
241
❖ Paper Output Capacity:
Standard 250 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lb.bond))
❖ Memory:
Standard 64 MB, up to 384 MB (with the optional Memory Unit)
❖ Network:
Protocol: TCP/IP, NetBEUI*1, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
*1 To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
Options
PAPER FEED UNIT Type 3000
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
410 × 536 × 146 mm (16.1 × 21.1 × 5.8 inches)
❖ Paper size:
A4, B5(JIS), 8 1/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11
❖ Paper weight:
60 - 105 g/m2, (16 - 28 lb. bond)
❖ Weight:
Less than 7.42 kg (16.3 lb)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
242
AD440
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
355 × 237 × 69 mm (12.8 × 9.3 × 2.7 inches)
Note
❒ This option is built into the machine.
❖ Paper size:
A4, B5(JIS), 8 1/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11
❖ Paper weight:
60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb. bond)
❖ Weight:
Less than 0.74 kg (1.6 lb. bond)
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000
❖ Storage Capacity (Formatted):
10 GB
❖ Specifications:
•
•
•
•
Spool print data to collate
Spool Sample/Locked Print data
Store PostScript fonts
Store log data
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
243
Note
❒ You can install PostScript fonts with this optional Printer Hard Disk Type 3000. With Macintosh,
types of fonts supported are PostScript Type 1 and PostScript Type 2. To download them, use
Printer Utility for Mac.
Memory Unit Type C 64/128/256MB
❖ Module Type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)
❖ Memory Type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)
❖ Number of Pins:
144 pins
User Account Enhance Unit Type B
❖ Capacity:
64 KB
❖ Specifications:
Store User Code (Up to 400 users)
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
244
Network Interface Board Type 3000
❖ Topology:
Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
❖ Protocols:
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
❖ Interface Connector:
RJ45
❖ Required Cable:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) cable
Category / Type 5 or better
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
❖ Interface:
IEEE Std. 1394-1955 compliant, IEEE Std. 1394-2000 compliant.
❖ Interface Connector:
IEEE 1394 (6 pins × 2)
❖ Required cable:
IEEE 1394 interface cable (6 pins x 4 pins, 6 pins x 6 pins)
Important
❒ You cannot plug devices together to create loops.
❒ Do not use a cable more than 4.5 meters long.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
245
❖ Connectable number of devices in a bus:
Maximum 63
❖ Allowed cable hops in a bus:
Maximum 16
❖ Data Transmission:
400 Mbps (Maximum)
❖ Power supply:
Non power supply
Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant)
802.11b Interface Unit TypeA (R-WL11)
❖ Transmission Spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
❖ Protocol:
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Note
❒ SmartNetMonitor and WebStatusMonitor are supported.
❖ Data Transfer Speed:
Auto select from below speed
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
246
❖ Frequency Range:
• Inch version:
2412-2462 Mhz (1-11 channels)
• Metric version:
2412-2472 Mhz (1-13 channels)
❖ Transmittable Distance:
1Mbps 400m *1
2Mbps 270m *1
5.5Mbps 200m *1
11Mbps 140m *1
*1 These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable distance indoors is 10-100
m, depending on the environment.
❖ Transmission Mode:
ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
247
Information about Installed Software
expat
Use of the software installed on this product, including the controller (hereinafter "software") and the expat
Version 1.95.2 application software (hereinafter "expat 1.95.2"), is subject to the following conditions:
The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the product including expat
1.95.2 and the product manufacturer allows the initial developer of expat 1.95.2 to be free from these
obligations.
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Note
❒ Information on expat 1.95.2 is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
248
JPEG LIBRARY
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
NetBSD
Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not in the public domain;
its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD source code. For exact
copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries, the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
249
D
Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Authors Name List
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentioned
in this document:
• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
250
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe for the NetBSD
Project.
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the NetBSD Project.
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden
This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R. Thorpe.
The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
INDEX
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510, 244
4C.Graphic Mode, 136
A
Access Control, 187
Append CR to LF, 171
Auto Continue, 149
Autonet, 232
telnet, 202
B
Bidirectional transmission, 31, 49, 68
B&W Page Detect, 149
Bypass Size, 122
C
cable, 244
Changing Names and Comments, 108
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 109
Web Browser, 111
Color Demo Page, 129
Color Regist., 136
community name, 192
Config. Page, 129, 130
251
Configuration
Windows 2000, 14
Windows XP, 34
configuration
NetWare, 71
NetWare 3.x, 76
NetWare 4.x, 5, 83
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Configuring, 108
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Windows 2000, 16
Windows NT 4.0, 54
Configuring the Protocols
Windows 2000, 14
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Windows XP, 34
Copies, 149
D
DHCP, 188, 231
dial up router, 228
Displaying the Status of Printer, 113
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 113
SmartNetMonitor for Client, 114
Web Browser, 115
Duplex, 149
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
252
E
Energy Saver 1, 149
E.Saver2 OnOff, 149
E. Saver2 Timer, 149
Escape key, 121
Ext. A4 Width, 171
F
Font Number, 171
Font Pitch, 171
fonts, 239
Font Source, 171
Form Lines, 171
G
Getting Printer Information over the Network, 206
H
HDD Format, 136
Hex Dump, 129
Host Interface, 120, 159, 160
Host Name, 203
I
IEEE 1394 Setup, 159
IEEE 802.11b, 159, 199
Image Density, 136
information
Network Interface Board configuration, 190, 214
print job, 212
print log, 213
system log, 191, 219
Installing
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 94
SmartNetMonitor for Client, 18, 37, 56
Installing Software
Windows 2000, 18
Windows NT 4.0, 56
Windows XP, 37
I/O Buffer, 159
I/O Timeout, 159
IP address, 185
IPP, 194
IPP for Printing
Windows 2000, 14
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Windows XP, 34
K
Key Repeat, 136
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
253
L
LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 55
Language, 120, 177
Letterhead Mode, 149
List/Test Print, 120, 129
List/Test Print Parameters, 129
Locked Print, 120
M
Maintenance, 120, 136, 137
Maint. Reset, 136
Making Printer Settings with the Control Panel, 116
memory, 241
Memory Capacity and Paper Size, 235
Memory Overflow, 149
Memory Unit Type C 64/128/256MB, 243
menu, accessing, 120
menu, changing, 177
Menu Chart, 116
Menu key, 120
Menu List, 129
Menu Protect, 136
message, 219
MIB, 180
MisfeedRecovery, 149
Monitoring, 108
N
NetWare, 71
NetWare 3.x, 76
NetWare 4.x, 5, 83
NetWare Printing, 230
Network Interface Board, 241
Network Interface Board Type 3000, 244
Network Setup, 159
NIB, 241
O
On Line key, 121
options, 241
Orientation, 171
P
Page Size, 149
Paper Input, 120, 122
Paper Type, 122
Password, 205
password, 103
PCL, 171
PCL Config.Page, 129
PCL Menu, 120
PlainPaper Type, 136
Point Size, 171
PostScript Printing from Windows, 230
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
254
precautions, 228
Print Area, 136
Printer Hard Disk Type 3000, 242
Printer Lang., 149
printer status, 190
Prt. Err Report, 149
PS Config. Page, 129
Pure IP, 86
R
Registration, 136
remote printer, setup
NetWare 4.x, 5, 88
Resolution, 149
ROM Update, 136
S
Sample Print, 120
SDRAM, 241
Series Prnt.Job, 136
Setting Up as a Print Server
NetWare3.x, 77
NetWare4.x/NetWare5.1, 84
Setting Up as a Remote Printer
NetWare3.x, 79
NetWare4.x/NetWare5.1, 88
Setting Up Options
Windows 2000, 30
Windows NT 4.0, 67
Windows XP, 48
Share Setting
Windows 2000, 33
Windows NT 4.0, 70
Windows XP, 51
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Installing, 94
SmartNetMonitor for Client
Installing, 18, 37, 56
SMB, 197
SNMP, 180, 191
sntp, 203
specifications, 237
Spool Printing, 149
subnet mask, 187
Sub Paper Size, 149
Symbol Set, 171
System, 120, 149
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
255
T
TCP/IP for Printing
Windows 2000, 14
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Windows XP, 34
telnet, 183
Autonet, 202
WINS, 201
Tray Locking, 122
Tray Priority, 122
U
Unit of Measure, 149
USB Setting, 159
User Account Enhance Unit Type B, 243
Using a Web Browser, 101
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 92
W
Windows 2000, 14
Share Setting, 33
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Share Setting, 70
Windows XP, 34
Share Setting, 51
WINS, 233
telnet, 201
WL.LAN Defaults, 136
WL.LAN Signal, 136
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
256
Copyright © 2002
Operating Instructions Administrator Reference
257
EE
GB
G081-6620
Operating Instructions Client Reference
1
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................7
How to Read This Manual ...................................................................................................................9
Confirming a Network Environment................................................................................................11
Windows Configuration................................................................................................................................... 12
Macintosh Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 18
UNIX Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 18
1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration
Printing with a Print Server ..............................................................................................................19
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server............................................ 19
Printing without Using a Print Server..............................................................................................25
Configuring the Protocols................................................................................................................................ 25
Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 28
Printing with Parallel Connection ....................................................................................................39
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 39
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 41
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ..........................................................................................43
Windows 98/Me-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB.............................................................................. 43
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 ...............................................................................45
Printing with IP over 1394............................................................................................................................... 45
Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................47
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5 or 7.0 .............................................................................50
Operating Instructions Client Reference
2
2. Windows 2000 Configuration
Printing with a Print Server ..............................................................................................................51
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server............................................ 51
Printing without Using a Print Server..............................................................................................57
Configuring the Protocols................................................................................................................................ 57
Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 60
Printing with Parallel Connection ....................................................................................................72
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 72
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 74
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ..........................................................................................77
Windows 2000-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ................................................................................ 77
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 ...............................................................................78
Printing with SCSI Print .................................................................................................................................. 78
Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................82
3. Windows XP Configuration
Printing with a Print Server ..............................................................................................................85
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server............................................ 85
Printing without Using a Print Server..............................................................................................91
Configuring the Protocols................................................................................................................................ 91
Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 93
Printing with Parallel Connection ..................................................................................................104
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver............................................................................................... 104
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver.......................................................................................................... 106
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ........................................................................................109
Windows XP-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ................................................................................. 109
Operating Instructions Client Reference
3
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 .............................................................................110
Printing with SCSI Print ................................................................................................................................ 110
Printing with IP over 1394............................................................................................................................. 113
Setting Up Options ...........................................................................................................................115
4. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration
Printing with a Print Server ............................................................................................................118
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server.......................................... 118
Printing without Using a Print Server............................................................................................124
Configuring the Protocols.............................................................................................................................. 124
Installing Software......................................................................................................................................... 128
Printing with Parallel Connection ..................................................................................................139
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver............................................................................................... 139
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver.......................................................................................................... 141
Setting Up Options ...........................................................................................................................143
5. Macintosh Configuration
Mac OS ..............................................................................................................................................145
Installing the Printer Driver and Software..................................................................................................... 146
Mac OS X ..........................................................................................................................................154
Installing the PPD File................................................................................................................................... 154
Setting Up the PPD File................................................................................................................................. 155
Setting Up Options ........................................................................................................................................ 155
Configuring Macintosh ....................................................................................................................156
Changing to EtherTalk................................................................................................................................... 156
Configuring the Printer .................................................................................................................................. 157
Changing the Printer Name ........................................................................................................................... 157
Changing the Zone......................................................................................................................................... 158
Operating Instructions Client Reference
4
6. NetWare Configuration
Windows 95/98/Me ...........................................................................................................................159
Windows 2000 ...................................................................................................................................162
Windows XP......................................................................................................................................165
Windows NT 4.0................................................................................................................................168
7. Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM .........................................................................171
Printer Drivers for This Printer......................................................................................................173
SmartNetMonitor for Admin ..........................................................................................................176
SmartNetMonitor for Client............................................................................................................178
8. Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 5c - Accessing the Printer Properties.....................................................................................181
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties................................................................................. 181
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................ 183
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................... 187
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................................................................... 190
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties .......................................................................................194
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties................................................................................. 194
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................ 197
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................... 200
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................................................................... 203
Operating Instructions Client Reference
5
PostScript 3 - Setting up for Printing .............................................................................................206
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties................................................................................. 206
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................ 209
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................................................................... 212
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................................................................... 215
Macintosh - Setting up for Printing ............................................................................................................... 218
Canceling a Print Job .......................................................................................................................220
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job .................. 220
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................. 221
9. Sample Print/Locked Print
Sample Print......................................................................................................................................222
Printing the Remaining Sets .......................................................................................................................... 224
Deleting a Sample Print File.......................................................................................................................... 226
Checking the Error Log ................................................................................................................................. 228
Locked Print......................................................................................................................................230
Entering the Password ................................................................................................................................... 232
Deleting the Locked Print File....................................................................................................................... 234
Checking the Error log................................................................................................................................... 236
10.Troubleshooting
Checking the Printer Status ............................................................................................................238
SmartNetMonitor for Client .......................................................................................................................... 238
Web Browser ................................................................................................................................................. 239
Operating Instructions Client Reference
6
11.Appendix
Color Guide .......................................................................................................................................240
Color Printing Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 240
Collate ................................................................................................................................................243
INDEX ................................................................................................................................. 244
Operating Instructions Client Reference
Introduction
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Trademarks
AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Novell, NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
7
Operating Instructions Client Reference
8
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
Operating Instructions Client Reference
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could
result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which
a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
9
Operating Instructions Client Reference
10
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
11
Confirming a Network Environment
Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows NT (Server)
NetWare (Server)
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT
NetWare
(Client)
Macintosh
UNIX
❖ Connecting Printer and Computer
•
•
•
•
Network connection (Ethernet cable, IEEE 1394 cable (IP over 1394), IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN))
Parallel connection (parallel cable)
USB connection (USB cable)
IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection (IEEE 1394 cable)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
12
Windows Configuration
❖ Connecting a Print Server
Print Server
Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0 Print Server
Windows 95/98/Me
•
•
•
•
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
See p.19 “Printing with a Print Server” in "Windows 95/98/Me Configuration".
See p.51 “Printing with a Print Server” in "Windows 2000 Configuration".
See p.85 “Printing with a Print Server” in "Windows XP Configuration".
See p.118 “Printing with a Print Server” in "Windows NT 4.0 Configuration".
Operating Instructions Client Reference
13
❖ Network Connection
• Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Macintosh
Operating Instructions Client Reference
14
• IEEE 802.11b
❖ad hoc mode
❖infrastructure mode
access point
Operating Instructions Client Reference
15
❖ Interface supported protocols
Interface
Protocol
Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 1394
(IP over 1394)
TCP/IP
❍
❍
❍
NetBEUI
❍
❍
×
NetWare
❍
AppleTalk
❍
❍
*1
❍
×
×
❍ means that the protocol is supported.
× means that the protocol is not supported.
*1
If the optional 802.11b Interface Unit Type A has been installed, you cannot use the ad hoc mode.
• See p.25 “Printing without Using a Print Server” in "Windows 95/98/Me Configuration".
• See p.57 “Printing without Using a Print Server” in "Windows 2000 Configuration".
• See p.91 “Printing without Using a Print Server” in "Windows XP Configuration".
• See p.124 “Printing without Using a Print Server” in "Windows NT 4.0 Configuration".
❖ Parallel Connection
•
•
•
•
See p.39 “Printing with Parallel Connection” in "Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration".
See p.72 “Printing with Parallel Connection” in "Windows 2000 Configuration".
See p.104 “Printing with Parallel Connection” in "Windows XP Configuration".
See p.139 “Printing with Parallel Connection” in "Windows NT 4.0 Configuration".
Operating Instructions Client Reference
16
❖ USB Connection
• See p.43 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in "Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration".
• See p.77 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in "Windows 2000 Configuration".
• See p.109 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in "Windows XP Configuration".
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Operating Instructions Client Reference
17
❖ IEEE 1394 Connection
• See p.45 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in "Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration".
• See p.78 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in "Windows 2000 Configuration".
• See p.110 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in "Windows XP Configuration".
SCSI prin
❖ Connecting a NetWare Server
See p.159 “NetWare Configuration”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
18
Macintosh Configuration
See p.145 “Macintosh Configuration”.
UNIX Configuration
Concerning UNIX printing information, please visit our Web site or consult your authorized reseller.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration
Printing with a Print Server
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print
Server
This section describes the procedures for setting up a client on a network that uses Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0 as a print server.
To print from Windows 95/98/Me, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the
print server.
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Print Server
19
Operating Instructions Client Reference
20
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
Preparation
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting "Network printer server", and then select
the Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer. For more information about how
to install and setting, see the Administrator Reference.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows
2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the
client has been set up and configured correctly.
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
21
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Select [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Browse for Printer"
window.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
22
N Configure the User Code and default printer as necessary.
❖ User Code
The procedure to specify the "User Code" may differ depending on the printer language.
• RPCS
You can specify the "User Code" when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or
edit the "User Code" from the Printer Driver dialog box. To change the "User Code", you
must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new "User Code" during the re-install
process.
• PCL 5c
You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer
driver. See printer driver's Help.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.47 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
23
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
24
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Browse].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Browse for Printer"
window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J After confirming that the location for the selected printer shown, click [Next].
K Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The installation is complete.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
M Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
25
Printing without Using a Print Server
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) interface or IEEE
1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select "SmartNetMonitor" when installing the printer driver.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 95/98/Me to use the TCP/IP protocol
and IPP.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP” in the Administrator
Reference.
Under Windows Me, when you want to use the IP over 1394, see the Option Setup Guide.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
26
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Windows 95/98
Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt].
B Windows Me
Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt].
C Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
❖ Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows 95/98/Me computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that “TCP/IP” is listed in the
[The following network components are installed:] box under the [Configuration] tab.
Note
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] under the [Configuration] tab and install it. For
more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows 95/98/Me Help.
❒ Under Windows Me, if you want to use IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface, make sure TCP/IP
is bound to the IEEE 1394 adaptor being used. The following message will be displayed:
B
TCP/IP -> (IEEE 1394 adaptor in use)
Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm that the settings are correct with the network administrator.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
27
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 95/98/Me to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Limitation
❒ To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer
Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows 95/98/Me computer and set it as the default protocol.
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that “NetBEUI” is listed in
the [The following network components are installed:] box under the [Configuration] tab.
Note
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] under the [Configuration] tab and install it.
For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows 95/98/Me Help.
❒ If “NetBEUI ->Dial-Up Adaptor” is listed in the [The following network components are installed:]
box, select it, and then click [Remove] to remove the binding.
B
Set the NetBEUI protocol as the default protocol. Click the [Configuration] tab, select “NetBEUI” in the [The following network components are installed:] box, and then click [Properties].
C Click the [Advanced] tab, select [Set this protocol to be the default protocol], and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box.
E When the message to restart appears, click [Yes].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
28
Installing Software
Preparation
If you are not using the print server, install SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then install the printer
driver by selecting "SmartNetMonitor for Client". This enables peer-to-peer network printing with the
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP protocol.
Note
❒ Under Windows Me, you can print using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
29
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
30
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
31
I Select SmartNetMonitor.
SmartNetMonitor
A Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
32
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share
name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
33
K Configure the User Code and default printer as necessary.
❖ User Code
The procedure to specify the "User Code" may differ depending on the printer language.
• RPCS
You can specify the "User Code" when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or
edit the "User Code" from the Printer Driver dialog box. To change the "User Code", you
must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new "User Code" during the re-install
process.
• PCL 5c
You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer
driver. See printer driver's Help.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
M When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
O Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.47 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
34
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
35
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Click to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click to select [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
M Select [Details], and then click [Add Port…].
N In the [Other] box, click to select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
O Select a printer you want to use.
TCP/IP
A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
36
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer
not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator
Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Type
the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share name". Do not type
"\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
37
IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B In [Printer URL], type “http://(printer's IP address)/printer” as the printer's IP address.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E Click [OK].
P Click [OK].
Q Confirm that the selected port is highlighted in [Printer to the following port], and then click
[OK].
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the Help file for the printer driver.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
38
R Restart the computer.
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
39
Printing with Parallel Connection
To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select "LPT1:" when installing the printer driver.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch),
Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
40
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I After confirming [Port:] that the location for [LPT1:] shown.
J Configure the User Code and default printer as necessary.
❖ User Code
The procedure to specify the "User Code" may differ depending on the printer language.
• RPCS
You can specify the "User Code" when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or
edit the "User Code" from the Printer Driver dialog box. To change the "User Code", you
must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new "User Code" during the re-install
process.
• PCL 5c/PostScript 3
You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer
driver. See printer driver's Help.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
41
K Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
L When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
M When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.47 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
42
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Click to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click to select [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.47 “Setting Up Options”.
K Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
43
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section describes basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers
can be installed from the provided CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not currently making prints
before installation.
Windows 98/Me-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
The procedure below takes Windows 98 as an example. The procedure for Windows Me may be slightly different.
When the USB cable is used for the first time, the "plug and play" function starts and [New Hardware
Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the
system used.
If the printer driver is already installed, the "plug and play" is displayed, and the printer with its port
directed to the USB cable is added to the "Printers" folder.
A Click [Next>].
B Select [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click [Next>].
C Check [Specify a location:], and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
44
D Insert the CD-ROM provided into the CD-ROM drive.
Note
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ If you want to inactivate Auto Run, press {Shift}
} when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and
keep it pressed until the computer completes transmission to the drive.
E Select the drive where the printer driver is located according to the operating system used, and
then click [Next>].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the folder will be "D:\Drivers\USBPRINT\WIN98ME".
F Confirm the printer driver location, and then click [Next>].
"USB Printing Support" will be installed.
G Click [Finish].
H Follow the "plug and play" on the screen to install the printer drivers.
When the installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to "USB00n" appears on the
[Printers] folder. ("n" is the number of printers connected.")
Operating Instructions Client Reference
45
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394
This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using IEEE 1394 interface. The
printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided.
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select "SmartNetMonitor"
when installing the printer driver. p.25 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.28 “Installing Software”
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not printing before installation.
Printing with IP over 1394
You can print by setting the IP address for this machine and the computer on which Windows Me is
installed.
Limitation
❒ When using the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface in a network, the Ethernet interface cannot be
used in the same network.
Note
❒ The maximum number of simultaneous print requests when connecting with IP over 1394 includes
the print requests from the Ethernet interface. For more information, see the Administrator Reference.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
46
Installing the Printer Driver
To Print using SmartNetMonitor. See p.25 “Printing without Using a Print Server”.
Note
❒ When [Add New Hardware Wizard] starts every time you restart the computer with an operating system,
which does not support SCSI print or plug in or out the cable, inactivate the device by following procedures.
A
In the [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [Windows has found the following new
Hardware: IEEE SBP-2 Device] is displayed, and select [Recommended search for a better driver
[Recommended]], and then click [Next>].
B When the [Windows was unable to locate the software for this device.] message appears, click
[Finish].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
47
Setting Up Options
You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click [Printer Configuration...] under the Print Settings tab.
E Select options you have installed from the [Option] group. And make any settings you require.
F Click [OK].
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
48
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows 95/98/Me,
the unavailable functions are shaded in the [Change Accessories] dialog box of the printer properties. The [Change Accessories] dialog box is displayed by clicking the [Change Accessories...] button under the [Printer Configuration] tab.
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bidirectional support for this printer] must be selected in
[Spool Settings…] on the [Details] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bidirectional support for this printer] must be selected in
[Spool Settings…] on the [Details] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
49
❖ When connecting with IEEE 1394
• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394
interface cable.
❖ When connecting with USB
The printer must be connected to the USB connector of a computer using the USB interface cable.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
50
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5 or 7.0
If you use the machine under Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0
with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy the PPD file to the PageMaker folder.
The PPD file is the file with extension “.ppd” in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM.
The “WIN9X_ME” folder, inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use the folder at this level
that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.
The third folder, “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language name.
Copy the file with extension “.ppd” to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.
• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
2. Windows 2000 Configuration
Printing with a Print Server
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print
Server
This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that uses Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0.
To print from Windows 2000, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the print
server.
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Print Server
51
Operating Instructions Client Reference
52
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
53
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Select [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Browse for Printer"
window.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
N Configure the User Code and default printer as necessary.
❖ User Code
When using RPCS, you can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See printer driver's Help.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
54
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.82 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
55
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
“Add Printer Wizard” starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Shared printers:"
window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J Start printer driver installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
56
K Click [Next>].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Finish].
The installation is complete.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
M Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
57
Printing without Using a Print Server
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) interface, select "SmartNetMonitor", "Standard TCP/IP Port", "LPR Port" when installing the printer driver.
•
SmartNetMonitor See p.57 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.60 “Installing Software” and p.61
“Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.66 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
•
Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port See p.57 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.61 “Installing the
PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.66 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Print Services for UNIX” must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 2000 to use the TCP/IP protocol and
IPP.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
58
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP” in the Administrator
Reference.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
❖ Configuring a Windows 2000 computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection].
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Confirm that “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [Components checked are used by
this connection:] box on the [General] tab.
Note
❒ If the check box for TCP/IP protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows 2000 Help.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
59
E
Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm that the settings are correct with the network administrator.
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure Network Interface Board and Windows 2000 to use the NetBEUI
protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ Configuring a Windows 2000 computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection].
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Confirm that “NetBEUI Protocol” is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
60
Note
❒ If the check box of the NetBEUI protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab and install it. For
more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows 2000 Help.
Installing Software
Preparation
If you are not using the print server, install SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then install the printer
driver by selecting "SmartNetMonitor for Client". This enables peer-to-peer network printing with the
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP protocol.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
61
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
62
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
63
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share
name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
64
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C
D
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
C Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
D Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box.
E Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
65
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
K Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
M When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
N When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
O Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.82 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
66
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
67
E Click [Next >].
F Select [Local printer], and then click [Next>].
G Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [Next >].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
68
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share
name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
69
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
D Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
E Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box, and then
click [Next>].
F Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
H Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
I Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
70
J Click [Next >].
K Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].
L Click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
M Set up the options.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the printer properties after installing the printer driver. See
printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
71
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
72
Printing with Parallel Connection
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select "LPT1:" when installing the printer driver.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
73
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I After confirming [Port:] that the location for [LPT1:] shown.
J Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
K Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
74
L When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
M When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled.
❒ For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.82 “Bidirectional
transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
75
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Click to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
I Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
76
J Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.82 “Setting Up Options”.
K Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
77
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section describes basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers
can be installed from the provided CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not currently making prints
before installation.
Windows 2000-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
Limitation
❒ Installing a printer driver requires the Administrators permission. When you install a printer driver,
log on using an account that has the Administrators permission.
When the USB cable is used for the first time, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears,
and Windows 2000's [USB Printing Support] will be installed automatically.
If the printer driver is already installed, the "plug and play" is displayed, and the printer with its port
directed to the USB cable is added to the "Printers" folder.
A Install the printer driver by referring to the instructions for installing the printer driver with
Parallel/Ethernet connection.
When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to "USB00n" appears on the [Printers] folder. ("n" is the number of printers connected.")
Operating Instructions Client Reference
78
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394
This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using IEEE 1394 interface. The
printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided.
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not printing before installation.
Printing with SCSI Print
Printing using a SCSI print device with the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 is possible under
Windows 2000.
Important
❒ The optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 can only be used with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or later. If
the Service Pack is not installed, the connectable SCSI print device in a 1394 bus is only one. The
client cannot install the printer driver without using an account with Administrators permission.
❒ Do not connect new IEEE 1394 or USB devices to PC or turn on other printer while installing the
printer driver.
❒ Before uninstalling the printer driver, be sure to disconnect the IEEE 1394 interface cable from the
computer.
❒ “SCSI print” must be set active from the control panel. For more information, see "IEEE 1394 Configuration" in the Option Setup Guide.
Note
❒ This machine cannot receive print data from more than one computer at the same time. If you send
data from your computer when data is being received from another computer, a message may appear on the computer display.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
79
Installing the Printer Driver
Note
❒ If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started or the cable is connected
with Windows 2000, inactivate the device. If you want to install another printer driver after setting
the "1394_00n" port, select the "1394_00n" port by following the procedures of installing a printer
driver.
❒ When the printer connected via the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 is installed properly, the
appearance of the icon in the printer folder changes according to whether the cable is plugged in or
not.
A Connect the printer and the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
B In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then click [Next>].
C When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown] message appears, select [Optional search locations:], and then click [Next>].
D When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, select the [Optional search locations.] check box,
and then select [Specify a location], and then click [Next>].
E Hold down the left {SHIFT}} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Keep the left {SHIFT}
} key held down until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM.
If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
F Click [Browse].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
80
G Select the printer driver that you want to use. The following are locations where printer drivers are stored:
• RPCS
\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5c
\DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
H Click [Open].
I Click [OK].
A printer model selection dialog box appears.
J Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
❒ If the printer driver is already installed, the printer icon is automatically added to the [Printer] folder. In such a case, installation of the printer driver is not necessary.
❒ When the installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to "1394_00n" appears on the
[Printers] folder. ("n" is the number of printers connected.")
❒ If printing does not work properly after installation, you need to delete the port and reinstall the
printer driver. For more information, see "Printer Does Not Print" in the Maintenance Guide.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
81
❒ If you do not want to install the printer when [Found New Hardware Wizard] starts with an operating
system, which supports SCSI print, inactivate the device by following the procedures.
A
In [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then click [Next>].
B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown] message appears, and select [Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]], and then click
[Next>].
C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all the selections from [Optional
search locations.], and then click [Next>].
D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable the device. The
Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].
❒ When [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time you restart the computer with an operating
system which does not support IP over 1394, plug in or take out the cable, inactivate the device
with the following procedure.
A
In [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then click [Next>].
B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device:] message appears and "IP
over 1394" appears select [Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]], and then
click [Next>].
C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all the selections from [Optional
search locations.], and then click [Next>].
D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable the device. The
Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
82
Setting Up Options
You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PS printer driver, Click the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options you have installed from the [Option] group. And make any settings you require.
F Click [OK].
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows 2000, the
[Change Accessories] tab is shaded.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
83
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
84
❖ When connecting with IEEE 1394
• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394
interface cable.
• [Activate] is selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [Activate] is selected in the Bidi-SCSI
print.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with USB
The printer must be connected to the USB connector of a computer using the USB interface cable.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
3. Windows XP Configuration
Printing with a Print Server
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print
Server
This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that uses Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0.
To print from Windows XP, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the print
server.
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Print Server
Windows XP
85
Operating Instructions Client Reference
86
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
87
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Select [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Browse for Printer"
window.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
88
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.115 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
89
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
“Add Printer Wizard” starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Shared printers:"
window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
90
K Click [Next>].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Finish].
The installation is complete.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
M Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
91
Printing without Using a Print Server
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) interface or IEEE
1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select "SmartNetMonitor", "Standard TCP/IP Port" or "LPR Port"
when installing the printer driver.
•
SmartNetMonitor See p.91 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.93 “Installing Software” and p.94
“Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.98 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
•
Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port See p.91 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.94 “Installing the
PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.98 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Print Services for UNIX” must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows XP to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
92
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP” in the Administrator
Reference.
To use the IP over 1394, see the Option Setup Guide.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [All Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.
❖ Configuring a Windows XP computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows XP computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Control Panel], and then click [Network and Internet Connections].
B Click [Local Area Connection].
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ With the IP over 1394, click [1394 Connection].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
93
D
Confirm that “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [Components checked are used by
this connection:] box on the [General] tab.
Note
❒ If the check box for TCP/IP protocol is not selected, select the box.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab and install it. For more
information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows XP Help.
E
Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm that the settings are correct with the network administrator.
Installing Software
Preparation
If you are not using the print server, install SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then install the printer
driver by selecting "SmartNetMonitor for Client". This enables peer-to-peer network printing with the
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP protocol.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
94
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Client, restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
95
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
Operating Instructions Client Reference
96
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
"192.168.0.2" is already used, "192.168.0.2xx" cannot be used. Similarly, when
"192.168.0.20" is already used, "192.168.0.2" cannot be used.
❒ You can set a port using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
Operating Instructions Client Reference
97
C
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
C Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
D Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box.
E Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
98
K Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
M When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
N When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
O Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.115 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
99
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Select [Local printer], and then click [Next>].
G Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• Standard TCP/IP Port
• LPR Port
Operating Instructions Client Reference
100
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [Next >].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❒ You can set a port using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
Operating Instructions Client Reference
101
C
As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [Standard TCP/IP] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
D Click [Next] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
E Type the printer name or IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" box, and then
click [Next>].
F Click [Finish] in the "Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard" window.
LPR Port
A Click [Create a new port:].
B Select [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
102
H Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
I Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
J Click [Next >].
K Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].
L Click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
M Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
103
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
104
Printing with Parallel Connection
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select "LPT1:" when installing the printer driver.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
105
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I After confirming [Port:] that the location for [LPT1:] shown.
J Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
K Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
106
L When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
M When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled.
❒ For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.115 “Bidirectional
transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
107
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
G Click the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
H Click to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next].
I Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
108
K Set up the options.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.
L Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
109
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section describes basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers
can be installed from the provided CD-ROM.
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not currently making prints
before installation.
Windows XP-Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
Limitation
❒ Installing a printer driver requires the Administrators permission. When you install a printer driver,
log on using an account that has the Administrators permission.
When the USB cable is used for the first time, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears,
and Windows XP's [USB Printing Support] will be installed automatically.
If the printer driver is already installed, the "plug and play" is displayed, and the printer with its port
directed to the USB cable is added to the "Printers and Faxes" folder.
With Windows XP, even if the printer driver has already been installed, [Found New Hardware Wizard]
may start when connecting the printer and the computer with the USB cable for the first time. In this
case, install the printer driver by following the procedure below.
A Install the printer driver by referring to the instructions for installing the printer driver with
Parallel/Ethernet connection.
When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to "USB00n" appears on the [Printers
and Faxes] folder. ("n" is the number of printers connected.")
Operating Instructions Client Reference
110
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394
This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using IEEE 1394 interface. The
printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided.
Important
❒ Be sure that all other applications are closed and that the computer is not printing before installation.
Printing with SCSI Print
Printing using a SCSI print device with the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 is possible under
Windows XP.
Important
❒ Do not connect new IEEE 1394 or USB devices to PC or turn on other printer while installing the
printer driver.
❒ Before uninstalling the printer driver, be sure to disconnect the IEEE 1394 interface cable from the
computer.
❒ “SCSI print” must be set active from the control panel. For more information, see "IEEE 1394 Configuration" in the Option Setup Guide.
Note
❒ This machine cannot receive print data from more than one computer at the same time. If you send
data from your computer when data is being received from another computer, a message may appear on the computer display.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
111
Installing the Printer Driver
Note
❒ If you want to install another printer driver after setting the "1394_00n" port, select the "1394_00n"
port by following the procedures of installing a printer driver.
❒ When the printer connected via the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 is installed properly, the
appearance of the icon in the printer folder changes according to whether the cable is plugged in or
not.
A Connect the printer and the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
B In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed, and select [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)], and
then click [Next>].
C When the [Please choose your search and installation option.] messages appears, select the
[Search for the best driver in these locations.] check box, and then select the [Include this location
in the search:] check box, and then select the [Include this location in the search:] check box.
D Hold down the left {SHIFT}} key and insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Note
❒ Keep the left {SHIFT}
} key held down until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM.
❒ If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
E Click [Browse].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
112
F Select the printer driver that you want to use. The following are locations where printer drivers are stored:
• RPCS
\DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5c
\DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
\DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
G Click [Open].
H Click [OK].
A printer model selection dialog box appears.
I Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ During installation in Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case,
click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation.
❒ When the installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to "1394_00n" appears on the
[Printers and Faxes] folder. ("n" is the number of printers connected.")
❒ If the printer driver is already installed, the printer icon is automatically added to the [Printers and
Faxes] folder. In this case, installation of the printer driver is not necessary.
❒ Even if the printer driver has already been installed, [Found New Hardware Wizard] may start when
connecting the printer and the computer with the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. In
this case, install the printer driver by following the procedure.
❒ If printing does not work properly after installation, you need to delete the port and reinstall the
printer driver. For more information, see "Printer Does Not Print" in the Maintenance Guide.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
113
❒ If you do not want to install the printer when [Found New Hardware Wizard] starts with an operating system, which supports SCSI print, inactivate the device by following the procedures.
A
In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [This wizard helps you install
software for: Unknown] is displayed, and select [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next>].
B When the [Please choose your search and installation option.] message appears, remove all
the selections from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next>].
C When the [The wizard could not find the software on your computer for..] message appears,
click [OK].
D When the [Cannot Install this Hardware] message appears, select the [Don't prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].
Printing with IP over 1394
You can print by setting the IP address for this machine and the computer on which Windows XP is
installed.
Preparation
"IP over 1394" must be set on the control panel and an IP address for the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
interface must be specified.
For more information about how to make printer settings, see "IEEE 1394 Configuration" in the Option Setup Guide.
Limitation
❒ When using the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface in a network, the Ethernet interface cannot be
used in the same network.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
114
Note
❒ The maximum number of simultaneous print requests when connecting with IP over 1394 includes
the print requests from the Ethernet interface. For more information, see the Administrator Reference.
Installing the Printer Driver
To Print using SmartNetMonitor. See p.91 “Printing without Using a Print Server”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
115
Setting Up Options
You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PS printer driver, Click the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options you have installed from the [Option] group. And make any settings you require.
F Click [OK].
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows XP, the
[Change Accessories] tab is shaded.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
116
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows XP, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling]
must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows XP, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling]
must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
117
❖ When connecting with IEEE 1394
• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394
interface cable.
• [Activate] is selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [Activate] is selected in the Bidi-SCSI
print.
• Under Windows XP, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling]
must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with USB
The printer must be connected to the USB connector of a computer using the USB interface cable.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
4. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration
Printing with a Print Server
Printing with a Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0 Print
Server
This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that uses Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0.
Printing from Windows NT 4.0, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port to the
print server.
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Print Server
118
Operating Instructions Client Reference
119
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
120
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Select [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Select [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Browse for Printer"
window.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
O Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
121
P When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
Q When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
R Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
122
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the "Shared printers:"
window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J After confirming that the location for the selected printer shown, click [Next].
K Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
123
L Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The installation is complete.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
M Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
124
Printing without Using a Print Server
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, select "SmartNetMonitor" or "LPR Port" when
installing the printer driver.
•
SmartNetMonitor
See p.124 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.128 “Installing Software” and p.129 “Installing the
PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver” or p.134 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
•
LPR Port
See p.124 “Configuring the Protocols” and p.129 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”
or p.134 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”.
Note
❒ If you want to use “LPR Port”, "Microsoft TCP/ IP Printing" must be installed.
Configuring the Protocols
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows NT 4.0 to use the TCP/IP protocol and
IPP.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Confirm that the TCP/IP protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP protocol.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
125
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP” in the Administrator
Reference.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message appears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message appears.
Request timed out.Request timed out.
❖ Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer
Follow these steps to configure a Windows NT 4.0 computer to use the TCP/IP protocol.
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that “TCP/IP Protocol” is
listed in the [Network protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab.
Note
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] under the [Protocols] tab and install it. For
more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see Windows NT 4.0 Help.
B
Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings.
Confirm that the settings are correct with the network administrator.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
126
C
Click the [Services] tab, and confirm that “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is installed.
If “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is not installed, click [Add] under the [Services] tab, and install
it. For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT 4.0
Help.
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows NT 4.0 to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
❖ Configuring the printer
Configure the printer to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Confirm that the NetBEUI protocol is set to be active. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the
Network” in the Quick Installation Guide.
❖ Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer
Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows NT 4.0 computer, and change the LAN adapter
number (Lana Number).
A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that “NetBEUI Protocol” is
listed in the [Network Protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab.
Note
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add...] under the [Protocols] tab, and install it. For
more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see Windows NT 4.0 Help.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
127
B
Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click “NetBIOS Interface” in the [Network
Services:] box, and click [Properties].
C Click the Lana Number corresponding to the Nbf protocol of the [Network Route] headline, and
click [Edit].
D Type “0” as the Lana Number.
Note
❒ If another protocol’s Lana Number is configured at “0”, change it to another number other than
“0”.
E
Click [OK].
F Click [Close], and close the [Network] dialog box.
G After confirming the message to restart, click [Yes].
Note
❒ After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
128
Installing Software
Preparation
If you are not using the print server, install SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then install the printer
driver by selecting "SmartNetMonitor for Client". This enables peer-to-peer network printing with the
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP protocol.
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
129
D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin].
E Click to select [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartNetMonitor for Admin,
restart the computer and continue with necessary configurations.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
130
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Select the printer model(s) you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I Click [Port:], and then select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• LPR Port
Operating Instructions Client Reference
131
SmarteNet Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then click [OK].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
132
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share
name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP settings dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure
the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client online Help.
E
Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
133
LPR Port
A Click [Add].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
J Make sure the location for the selected printer is shown after [Port:].
K Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
L Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
M When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
O Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
134
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
135
E Click [Next].
F Select the port you want to use.
• SmartNetMonitor
• LPR Port
SmartNetMonitor
A Click [Add Port:].
B Select [SmartNetMonitor], and then [New Port...].
C Select a printer you want to use.
❖ TCP/IP
A
Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
Available printers will be listed.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For example, when
“192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, when
“192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
❖ NetBEUI
A
Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers that can be used by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
136
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a
printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type the NetBEUI address. Confirm
the NetBEUI address on the network is on the configuration page. For more information
about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page” in the Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of "%%Computer name\Share
name". Do not type "\\" as head characters but "%%".
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.
❖ IPP
A
Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type "http://printer's-ip-address/ printer" or
"ipp://printer's-ip-address/printer" in the [Printer URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Type a different
name from those of any existing port name.
If you omit this, the address typed in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name.
D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the
necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
E
Click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
137
LPR Port
A Click [Add Port:].
B Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
C Type the printer's IP address in the "Name or address of server providing lpd" box.
D Type "lp" in the "Name of printer or print queue on that server" box, and then click [OK].
G Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Configure the default printer as necessary. Check [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.
I Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Start printer driver installation.
J Set up the options.
Note
❒ You can specify the "User Code" with the Printer Properties after installing the printer driver. See
printer driver's Help.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
K Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
138
Changing Port Settings
Follow the steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as the proxy server settings or
IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].
B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartNetMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the taskbar.
C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each
port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
139
Printing with Parallel Connection
Preparation
To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select "LPT1:" when installing the printer driver.
Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
140
D Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license
agreement, and then click [Next].
F Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears.
You can select more than one printer driver.
G Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system
being used, the model of printer selected, and the port being used.
I After confirming [Port:] that the location for [LPT1:] shown.
J Configure the default printer as necessary.
❖ Default Printer
Check [Default Printer] to set the printer as the default printer.
K Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.
Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Yes]
to continue the installation.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
141
L When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].
M When the installation completion dialog box appears, click [Finish].
N Set up the options.
Note
❒ You must set up the options when the bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about the status of the bidirectional transmission, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
142
C Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish),
Svenska (Swedish)
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed
in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Click to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next].
H Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next].
I Click [Next].
J Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Set up the options with the printer driver.
Reference
For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”.
K Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
143
Setting Up Options
You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
Note
❒ If you use the RPCS printer driver, Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you use the PS printer driver, Click the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options you have installed from the [Option] group. And make any settings you require.
F Click [OK].
- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, the information about the paper size and feed direction setting is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also confirm the printer status from your
computer.
• Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and
Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows 95/98/Me,
the unavailable functions are shaded.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
144
Note
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission, you can update the printer status
manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:
❖ When connecting with a parallel cable
•
•
•
•
The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission.
The machine must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cable and parallel
connector.
• Under Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connecting with the network
• The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.
• Under Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
• Under Windows NT4.0, specified IP address in the Microsoft TCP/IP print is used.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
5. Macintosh Configuration
This section describes how to configure Mac OS.
• If you are using Mac OS, see “Mac OS”.
• If you are using Mac OS X, see p.154 “Mac OS X”.
Mac OS
This section describes how to configure Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB. The following procedure
describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac OS 9.1, see the manual that comes
with your version of the Mac OS for more information.
Limitation
❒ For use with Mac OS 8.6 or later. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
❒ For use with a Macintosh, Power PC is required.
Note
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1
145
Operating Instructions Client Reference
146
Installing the Printer Driver and Software
Preparation
If the AdobePS installation starts under Mac OS X, the desktop automatically changes to the Classic
environment. If you want to set a printer with Mac OS X, see ⇒ p.154 “Mac OS X”.
Installing the PostScript Printer Driver and PPD File
It is necessary to install a printer driver and a PPD file to print from a Macintosh.
Follow these steps to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Macintosh using Mac OS 8.6 or later.
PostScript Printer Driver
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
B Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
D Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
E Double-click the folder of the language you use.
F Open [DISK1], and then double-click the installer icon.
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
147
PPD File
A Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
B Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
C Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder.
D Double-click the folder of the language you use.
E Open [Disk1].
F Drag the PPD file and the Plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions] in [System Folder].
G Restart the Macintosh.
Setting Up the PPD File
Preparation
Confirm that the printer is connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following procedure.
A On the [Apple] menu, select [Chooser].
B Click the [Adobe PS] icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
148
D Click [Create].
E Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Select].
The PPD file is set up, and the [Adobe PS] icon appears at the left of the printer name in the list.
Next, follow the procedure on p.149 “Setting Up Options” to make the option settings, or close the
[Chooser] dialog box.
Creating a Desktop Printer icon
Preparation
Confirm that the printer is connected to the USB before performing the following procedure.
To use a printer connected by USB, create a Desktop Printer icon.
A Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility] in the [AdobePS Components] folder.
B Select [AdobePS] in [With:] and [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then click [OK].
C Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection].
D Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK].
E Click [Auto Setup] in [PostScriptTM Printer Description (PPD) File].
F Click [Create].
G Enter the printer name, and then click [Save].
The printer icon appears on the desktop.
H Exit the Desktop Printer Utility.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
149
Setting Up Options
A On the [Apple] menu, select [Chooser].
B Click the [Adobe PS] icon.
C In the [Select the PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then
click [Setup].
D Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.
E Select the option you want to set up, and then select the appropriate setting for it.
Note
❒ If the option you want to set up is not displayed, the PPD file might not be set up correctly. Check
the name of the PPD file shown in the dialog box.
F Click [OK].
The list of options closes.
G Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.
H Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
150
Installing the ColorSync profile
ColorSync profile makes it possible for the printer to print colors of similar intensity to those that appear on your computer display. You must install the ColorSync profile to use this feature.
Note
❒ The ColorSync profile confirms with the color characteristics defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC).
❒ Some computer displays may require particular settings to be controlled by ColorSync. See the documentation that comes with your display for details.
The following procedure shows how to install the ColorSync profile.
A Start the Macintosh.
B Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for installing the ColorSync profile.
Note
❒ The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on the version of the operating system. The following are examples:
•
System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles
•
System: ColorSync profiles
C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The icon of the CD-ROM appears.
D Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
151
E Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
F Double-click the [ColorSyncTM Profiles] folder in the CD-ROM.
G Drag the file to the [ColorSyncTM Profiles] folder on the hard disk.
The ColorSync profile is installed.
Installing the Adobe Type Manager
Note
❒ Close all applications that are running before the installation. Install ATM after you restart the computer.
A Start the Macintosh.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [ATM] folder.
F Double-click the [ATM 4.6.2 installer] icon.
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
H When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only
after restarting.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
152
I Select [Control Panel] from the Apple menu, and then select [~ATM].
J Open the ATM control panel.
Note
❒ For more information about installation, see the User's Guide in the ATM folder.
Installing screen fonts
The screen fonts described below can be found in the CD-ROM, in the folder named [Fonts].
A Start the Macintosh.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
F Double-click the [Screen font] folder.
G Double- click the [TrueType] or [Type1] folder.
Select the font type you want to use.
H Copy the fonts you want to install in [Fonts] in [System Folder].
A Confirmation dialog box appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
153
I Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
J Restart the Macintosh.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
154
Mac OS X
This section describes how to configure a Mac OS X to use Ether Talk. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac OS X 10.1, see the manual that
comes with your version of the Mac OS X for more information.
Limitation
❒ For use with Mac OS X 10.1 or later.
❒ For use with a Macintosh, Power PC is required.
Note
❒ The PPD file is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS X:PPD Installer
Installing the PPD File
It is necessary to install a PPD file to print from a Macintosh.
Preparation
You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For more information, consult your administrator.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
B Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
D Double-click the installer icon.
E Follow the instructions on the screen.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
155
Setting Up the PPD File
A Run Print Center.
B Click [Add Printer].
Select [AppleTalk] in the first pop-up menu.
If the zone has been set, select the zone in the second pop-up menu.
C Select the PPD file of the model you are using from the "Printer Model:" pop-up menu, and
then click [Add].
Setting Up Options
Limitation
❒ You cannot make the printer option settings under Mac OS X. Do not make settings for options that
have not been installed.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
156
Configuring Macintosh
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure to configure a Macintosh to use EtherTalk.
Reference
For more information about installing the software required for EtherTalk, see the Macintosh manuals.
Mac OS
A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [AppleTalk] icon.
B From the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, select "Ethernet".
C If you change zones, select a name from the [Current zone:] pop-up menu.
D Close the [AppleTalk] control panels.
E Restart the computer.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
157
Mac OS X
Preparation
You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For more information, consult your administrator.
A Open [System Preference], and then click the [Network] icon.
B Click the [AppleTalk] tab.
C If you change zone, select a name from the [AppleTalk Zone:] pop-up menu.
D When the setting is complete, click [Apple Now].
Configuring the Printer
Use the control panel to activate the AppleTalk protocol. (The factory default is active.)
Reference
For more information about the configuration, see the "Configuring the Printer for the Network with
the Control Panel" in the Quick Installation Guide.
Changing the Printer Name
If the network has several same model printers, the names will be the same. Printers that have the same
name will have their names changed slightly in the Chooser. For example, three printers named "printer" will appear in the chooser as "printer0", "printer1" and "printer2".
To install from Printer Utility for Mac, see the PostScript 3 Supplement.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
158
Changing the Zone
It may be necessary to change the zone configuration.
To install from Web Status Monitor, see the Administrator Reference.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
6. NetWare Configuration
This chapter describes how to set up a client computer when using a NetWare print server.
Note
❒ Use the version of Novell Client provided with your operating system or the latest version.
❒ This section assumes that the client has NetWare client applications installed and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. If not, install the necessary applications before
starting the setting up procedure.
Windows 95/98/Me
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 95/98/Me client.
After installing the printer driver, change the print port to NetWare queue.
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.
A Install the printer driver you want to use as "Local Printer".
Reference
For more information about installing the printer driver, see p.39 “Printing with Parallel Connection”.
Note
❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recommended.
Important
❒ Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time.
When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the
new one.
159
Operating Instructions Client Reference
160
B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
C In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use.
On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Add Port].
E Click [Network], and then click [Browse].
F On the network tree, double-click the name of the file server.
The queues are displayed.
G Click the queue you want to print, and then click [OK].
H Click [OK].
In the [Print to the following port] box, a network path to the printer appears.
I Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and open it again.
J Click the [Printer Settings] tab.
K Click to clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check boxes.
Note
❒ You should not check these boxes because they should be specified using the printer driver. If
they are selected, the printer might not print correctly.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
161
When using the PostScript 3 printer driver
Follow these steps to set up for the PostScript 3 printer driver.
A Click the [PostScript] tab.
B Click [Advanced].
C Click to clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes.
L Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
162
Windows 2000
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 2000 client.
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.
A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want
to use, and then double-click it.
The printers dialog box appears.
B Click [No].
C Close all applications that are running.
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
E Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsh (German), English
(English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyer (Hungarian), Nederlands
(Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
163
Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the licenseagreement, and then click [Next].
C Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears,
and then click [Next].
You can select more than one printer driver.
D Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
E Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings, and then click [Port:]
F From the [Change settings for 'Port'] list box drop-down list box, select the queue you selected
in step A.
G Click [Continue]. Go to step F.
Using the PostScript Printer Driver
A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
B Click [Next].
C Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
D From the [Use the following port:] list box, select the queue you selected in step A.
E Click [Next].Go to step F.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
164
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
165
Windows XP
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows XP client.
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.
A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon, and then navigate to the queue you want to use, and
then double-click it.
The printers dialog box appears.
B Click [Cancel].
C Close all applications that are running.
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
E Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsh (German), English
(English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyer (Hungarian), Nederlands
(Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
166
Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the licenseagreement, and then click [Next].
C Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears,
and then click [Next].
You can select more than one printer driver.
D Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
E Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings, and then click [Port:]
F From the [Change settings for 'Port'] list box drop-down list box, select the queue you selected
in step A.
G Click [Continue]. Go to step F.
Using the PostScript Printer Driver
A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
B Click [Next].
C Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
D From the [Use the following port:] list box, select the queue you selected in step A.
E Click [Next].Go to step F.
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
167
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
168
Windows NT 4.0
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows NT 4.0 client.
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.
A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want
to use, and then double-click it.
The printers dialog box appears.
B Click [No].
C Close all applications that are running.
D Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
E Select a language to change the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsh (German), English
(English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyer (Hungarian), Nederlands
(Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
Operating Instructions Client Reference
169
Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver
A Select [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the licenseagreement, and then click [Next].
C Select a printer drivers you want to use when the "Printer Program" dialog box appears,
and then click [Next].
You can select more than one printer driver.
D Check [Printer Name] to select the model(s) of printer you want to use.
To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
E Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings, and then click [Port:]
F From the [Change settings for 'Port'] drop-down list box, select the queue you selected in step
A.
G Click [Continue]. Go to step F.
Using the PostScript Printer Driver
A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
"Add Printer Wizard" starts.
B Click [My Computer], and then click [Next].
C From the [Use the following port:] list box, select the queue you selected in step A.
D Click [Next].Go to step F.
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
170
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
7. Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM
There are three CD-ROMs that come with this printer. These are labeled "Operating Instructions",
"Printer Drivers and Utilities" and "Desk Top Binder V2 Lite". The following items are included on the
three separate CD-ROMs.
❖ Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000
Helps you to install new screen fonts, or organize and manage fonts already installed on the system.
For more information about Agfa Font Manager, see the manual on the CD-ROM labeled "Printer
Drivers and Utilities".
❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin
An utility for the system administrator to manage printers on the network.
Reference
For more information about SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see the SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Help file.
❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client
A utility for users to manage their own print status on the network.
Reference
For more information about SmartNetMonitor for Client, see the SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
❖ 1394 Utility
This utility is for the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510. For more information, see the Readme
file or the manual that comes with the optional 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510.
❖ USB Printing Support
Using the USB connection on the computer running Windows 98SE/Me requires to install this utility.
171
Operating Instructions Client Reference
172
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM
Follow the steps to view the contents of the CD-ROM.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].
Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
173
Printer Drivers for This Printer
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are
included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer.
Printer Language
PCL 5c
RPCS
PostScript 3
Windows 95 *1
√
√
√ *9
Windows 98 *2
√
√
√ *9
Windows Me *3
√
√
√ *9
Windows 2000 *4
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ *8
Operating system
Windows XP
*5
Windows NT 4.0 *6
*9
Mac OS *7
√ *9
Mac OS X
√ *10
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
Microsoft Windows Me operating system
Microsoft Windows 2000 professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
174
*7
*8
*9
*10
Required version is 8.6 or later. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
Requires Service Pack 6 or later.
The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the
CD-ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and Utilities".
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and
Utilities".
❖ PCL 5c printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language.
⇒ p.181 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.183 “Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.187 “Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.190 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
❖ RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. The
preset type user interface is provided in addition to the conventional one.
⇒ p.194 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.197 “Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.200 “Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.203 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
❖ Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files
The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-ROM that comes
with this printer. Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the
printer via a printer language. The PPD files allow the printer driver to enable the printer specific
functions.
⇒ p.206 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.209 “Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
Operating Instructions Client Reference
175
⇒ p.212 “Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.215 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties”
⇒ p.218 “Macintosh - Setting up for Printing”
❖ PPD files
The PPD files are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. The PPD files allow the
printer driver to enable the printer specific functions.
See p.218 “Macintosh - Setting up for Printing”.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
176
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is software that uses the TCP/IP and IPX/SPX protocols to monitor the
printers in a network. It can monitor multiple network printers with IP addresses. We recommend network administrators to use this software.
❖ File Path
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
NETWORK\NETMON\ADMIN\DISK1
OS
Protocol Stack
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98
Novell Client for Windows 95/98
Microsoft Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Microsoft Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client for Windows XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Operating Instructions Client Reference
177
❖ What can it do?
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is equipped with the following functions.
• Checks the information on printing, paper exhaustion, and such, on the computer.
• Checks the results of print jobs executed from the computer.
Note
❒ Using this function requires the User Account Enhance Unit Type B.
Reference
For the operations of the system administrator, see "Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin" in the
Administrator Reference.
For more information about using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see the SmartNetMonitor for Admin Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
178
SmartNetMonitor for Client
SmartNetMonitor for Client is software equipped with the following functions. We recommend all users of this printer to install this software.
• Provides the function to print in a Peer-to-Peer network, using the TCP/IP protocol, NetBEUI, and
IPP from Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows NT 4.0.
• Uses the TCP/IP and IPX/SPX protocols to constantly monitor the status of devices in a network.
❖ File Path
SmartNetMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
NETWORK\NETMON\CLIENT\DISK1
OS
Protocol Stack
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetBEUI provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98/Me
Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me
Microsoft Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetBEUI provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Operating Instructions Client Reference
179
OS
Microsoft Windows XP
Protocol Stack
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client for Windows XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
NetBEUI provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
❖ What can it do?
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
• Device Information function
• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of devices.
• Checks the number of pages printed for each computer, using the user codes.
• Checks the results of print jobs executed from the computer.
• Enables you to change the printer's network settings.
• Device Settings function
• Limits the settings to be done from the control panel, and disables changes to be made to some
of the items.
• Enables the selection of paper type loaded in the printer.
• Energy Saver function
• Switches to the Energy Saver mode, and wakes up from the Energy Saver mode.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
180
• System Status function
• Checks the information on printing, paper exhaustion, and such, on the computer.
• Groups function
• Monitors multiple printers at the same time. When there are many printers, you can create
groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.
Limitation
❒ Make similar settings for the option configuration of the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and
the printer for giving print commands. If the required options necessary for printing, such as the
Paper Feed Unit, are not installed on the substitute printer, that function is disabled.
❒ Load paper of the same size on both the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and the printer for
giving print commands. When specifying a particular Paper Tray for printing, load paper of the
same size into that tray.
❒ If the type and devices of the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and the printer for giving commands are different, the print results might not turn out identical.
❒ If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot execute Recovery/Parallel Printing.
Reference
For more information about using SmartNetMonitor for Client, See the SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
8. Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 5c - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Making default printer settings
To make the default printer settings, first open the Printer Properties dialog box from the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
181
Operating Instructions Client Reference
182
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows 95/98/Me.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application
you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
183
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
184
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D
Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
185
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
186
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows 2000.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
187
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Pritners and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D
Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
188
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
189
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows XP.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
190
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making default printer settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server
Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When
you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
191
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PCL 5c
DRIVERS\PCL5C\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
192
Making default printer settings - Default Document Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by
default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
193
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application
you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
194
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two windows types you can use to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
“Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. See Help for information about changing the windows
types.
❖ Multi-tab
This is the window type for users who often change print settings in order to make various kinds of
prints.
❖ Custom Setting
This is the window type for users who rarely change print settings when making prints. The Custom
Setting display may vary depending on the installed options.
Making default printer settings
Making the default printer settings, first open the Printer Properties dialog box from the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
195
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
196
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows 95/98/Me.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application
you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
197
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D
Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
198
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
199
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows 2000.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
200
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Pritners and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D
Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
201
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Pritners and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
202
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows XP.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
203
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making default printer settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server
Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When
you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
204
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• RPCS
DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
Making default printer settings - Default Document Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by
default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
205
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].
The Default Document Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on
the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
206
PostScript 3 - Setting up for Printing
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Making default printer settings
To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties dialog box from the [Printers] window.
Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
207
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
E Click [OK].
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
Operating Instructions Client Reference
208
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows 95/98/Me.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application
you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
209
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
210
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP(Language)\DISK1
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
211
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows 2000.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A
On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
212
Windows XP - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
213
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators
and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission.
A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
214
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The Printing Preferences Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from
that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application
that comes with Windows XP.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A
On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start your printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
215
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making default printer settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server
Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When
you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears .
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When you open the Printer Properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the Printer Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not set [Form to Tray Assignment].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
216
- If a message is displayed during installation of the printer driver
When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message
dialog box appears.
In such a case, you cannot install with the Auto Run program. Use the driver that was used in installing
the driver that is displayed in the message, and reinstall with [Add Printer].
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
C Follow the wizard to install the driver.
If the printer driver disk is a CD-ROM, the sources of installation are as follows. If the installer starts
up, click [Cancel] to quit it.
• PostScript 3
DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1
Making default printer settings - Default Document Properties
Limitation
❒ To change the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by
default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click to select the icon of the printer you want to use.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
217
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties dialog box from that
application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that
comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
❒ The actual procedure you should follow to open the Printer Properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application
you are using.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default
settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
218
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Macintosh - Setting up for Printing
Making paper settings from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
C Confirm that the printer you want to use is shown in [Format for:], and then use [Paper]*1 to
select the paper size you want to use.
Under Mac OS X, this is called [Paper Size].
Note
❒ If the printer is now shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu to display a list of available printers.
Reference
The actual appearance of the [Page Setup] dialog box depends on the application you are using.
See the documentation that comes with the Macintosh for more information.
D After configuring the settings, click [OK].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
219
Setting up for printing from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
C Confirm that the printer is selected in the [Printer] box, and then make the printer settings.
D After configuring the settings, click [Print].
Operating Instructions Client Reference
220
Canceling a Print Job
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar.
A window appears, showing all the print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the
current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
Note
❒ You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printer]
window.
D Press {Job Reset}} on the control panel.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled.
Important
❒ When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel
someone else's print job.
Note
❒ This procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the printer. In some cases, the
printer may already be processing data for the next series of print jobs following the one currently
being output. In this case, the next print jobs are also canceled when you press {Job Reset}
}.
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
221
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer's icon on the desktop.
A window appears, showing all the print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the
current status of the job you want to cancel.
Note
❒ Under Mac OS X, start Print Center.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
D Press {Job Reset}} on the control panel.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being canceled.
Important
❒ When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel
someone else's print job.
Note
❒ This procedure cancels the print job that is being processed by the printer. In some cases, the
printer may already be processing data for the next series of print jobs following the one currently
being output. In this case, the next print jobs are also canceled when you press {Job Reset}
}.
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
9. Sample Print/Locked Print
Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print jobs. The remaining sets are saved on
the optional Hard Disk Drive in the printer. The saved job can be printed or cancelled from the printer's
control panel.
Important
❒ If you turn off the power switch, the job that was saved on the Hard Disk Drive will be deleted.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, the optional Hard Disk Drive must be installed on the printer.
Reference
For more information about settings for printer driver, see the printer driver's Help file.
Note
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the time when the job was stored.
❒ The actual number of pages the printer can save depends on the contents of the print images. For
example, the printer can save up to 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for Sample Print and Locked Print. It
depends on the data volume.
❒ If the first set of the Sample Print file is not as you expected and you do not want to print the remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control panel.
❒ If you print the remaining sets of the Sample Print file, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.
❒ The following procedures describe how to use this function with the PCL 5c or RPCS printer driver
under Windows. If you want to use this function with the PostScript 3 printer driver or on a Macintosh, see the PostScript 3 Supplement.
222
Operating Instructions Client Reference
223
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties dialog box appears.
C From the [Job Type:] box, select [Sample Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, type a User ID of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
Note
❒ This is used to identify the user associated with a job.
❒ The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E Click [OK].
F After making the necessary settings, click [OK].
G Check the print job, and then select from the control panel whether to print the remaining sets
or delete them.
Reference
⇒ p.224 “Printing the Remaining Sets”
⇒ p.226 “Deleting a Sample Print File”
Operating Instructions Client Reference
224
Printing the Remaining Sets
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display "Sample Print", and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Sample Print
The User ID and the time when the job was stored are displayed.
C Press {U} or {T} to display the file you want to print, and then press {Enter #}}.
Sample Print
08:56 ABCD1234
Operating Instructions Client Reference
225
D Confirm that "Print File" is displayed, and then press {Enter #}}.
Select Action:
Print File
The remaining sets are displayed.
Note
❒ To cancel printing, press {Escape}
}.
E Press {Enter #}}. To change the number of sets you want to print, press {U} or {T} and select
the number of sets, and then press {Enter #}
}.
Qty: 6(1-999)
Press # to Print
The job is printed, and the job that was saved on the Hard Disk Drive is deleted.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
226
Deleting a Sample Print File
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display the "Sample Print" menu, and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Sample Print
C Press {U} or {T} to display the file you want to delete, and then press {Enter #}}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Sample Print:
08:56 ABCD1234
Operating Instructions Client Reference
227
D Press {U} or {T} to display "Delete File", and then press {Enter #}}.
Select Action:
Delete File
Note
❒ If you want to cancel the deletion of a Sample Print file, press {Escape}
}.
E Press {Enter #}} to delete the file.
The following message appears on the panel display.
08:56 ABCD1234
Press# to Delete
F Press {On Line}}.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Client Reference
228
Checking the Error Log
When a print job is not saved on the Hard Disk Drive, it remains in the error log and can be checked
using the control panel.
Limitation
❒ The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the power switch, the errors will be
deleted.
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display "Sample Print", and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Sample Print
The User ID and the time when the job was stored are displayed.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
229
C Press {U} or {T} to display "Error File(s)", and then press {Enter #}}.
Sample Print:
Error File(s)
D Press {U} or {T} to check the log.
Error File(s):
06:52 AB5D1234
After you finish checking the error log, press {Escape}
}.
The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu.
Note
❒ To print a document with an error, either print or delete the job saved on the Hard Disk Drive,
and then printing command the host computer to print again.
E When you finish checking the error log, press {Escape}}.
The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu.
F Press {On Line}}.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Client Reference
230
Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents. Documents will not be
printed out automatically, unless a password is entered, using the control panel after sending the print
job.
Important
❒ If you turn off the power switch, the job that was saved on the Hard Disk Drive will be deleted.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, the optional Hard Disk Drive must be installed on the printer.
Reference
For more information about printer driver settings, see the printer driver's Help file.
Note
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the time when the job was stored.
❒ The actual number of pages the printer can save depends on the contents of the print images. For
example, the printer can save up to 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for Sample Print and Locked Print. It
depends on the data volume.
❒ The following procedures describe how to use this function with the PCL 5c or RPCS printer driver
under Windows. If you want to use this function with the PostScript 3 printer driver or on a Macintosh, see the PostScript 3 Supplement.
After the Locked Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.
A From an application, select the menu command to print.
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Open the Printer Properties.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
231
C From the [Job Type:] box, select [Locked Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, type a User ID of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
Note
❒ This is used to identify the user associated with a job.
❒ The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E In the [Password:] box, type a password of four digits.
Note
❒ The password must be four digits (0-9).
F Command to print.
The job is saved on the Hard Disk Drive.
G Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete.
Reference
⇒ p.232 “Entering the Password”
⇒ p.234 “Deleting the Locked Print File”
Limitation
❒ Print jobs are not saved on the Hard Disk Drive in the following cases. You can check the error
log for jobs that were not saved.
• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the Hard Disk Drive, and a
31st job is transmitted.
• The total number of pages saved on the Hard Disk Drive exceeds 1,000 pages.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
232
Entering the Password
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display "Locked Print", and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Locked Print
The User ID and the time when the job was stored are displayed.
C Press {U} or {T} to display a file you want to print, and then press {Enter #}}.
Locked Print
08:56
ABCD1234
Operating Instructions Client Reference
233
D Enter the password.
A Press {U} or {T} to enter the left most digit of the password, and then press {Enter #}
}.
Password:
[0---]
B The next digit appears.
Password:
[*0--]
C Enter the remaining digit of the password, and then press {Enter #}
}.
E Confirm that "Print File" is displayed, and then press {Enter #}}.
Select Action:
Print File
Note
❒ If you want to cancel printing, press {Escape}
}.
F Press {Enter #}}.
08:56 ABCD1234
Press # to Print
The job is printed, and the job that was saved on the Hard Disk Drive is deleted.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
234
Deleting the Locked Print File
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display the "Locked Print" menu, and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Locked Print
C Press {U} or {T} to display a file you want to delete.
Locked Print
08:56 ABCD1234
Operating Instructions Client Reference
235
D Enter the password of the Locked Print file.
A Press {U} or {T} to enter the left most digit of the password, and then press {Enter #}
}.
Password:
[0---]
B The next digit appears.
Password:
[*0--]
C Repeat steps A and B to enter the remaining password digits, and then press {Enter #}
}.
E Press {U} or {T} to display "Delete File", and then press {Enter #}}.
Select Action:
Delete File
Note
❒ If you want change the Locked Print file, press {Escape}
}.
F Press {Enter #}}.
"Deleted" appears on the panel display, and then the printer returns to the previous menu.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
236
Checking the Error log
When a print job is not saved on the Hard Disk Drive, it remains in the error log and can be checked
using the control panel.
Limitation
❒ The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the printer power, the errors will be
deleted.
A Press {Menu}}.
ZHBS010E
"Menu" appears on the panel display.
B Press {U} or {T} to display "Locked Print", and then press {Enter #}}.
Menu:
Locked Print
The User ID and the time when the job was stored are displayed.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
237
C Press {U} or {T} to display "Error File(s)", and then press {Enter #}}.
Locked Print:
Error File(s)
D Press {U} or {T} to check the log.
Error File(s):
06:52 AB5D1234
After you finish checking the error log, press {Escape}
}.
The display returns to the Locked Print job selection menu.
Note
❒ To print a document with an error, either print or delete the job saved on the Hard Disk Drive,
and then printing command the host computer to print again.
E When you finish checking the error log, press {Escape}}.
The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu.
F Press {On Line}}.
"Ready" appears on the panel display.
Ready
Operating Instructions Client Reference
10. Troubleshooting
Checking the Printer Status
SmartNetMonitor for Client
A Start up SmartNetMonitor for Client.
B Right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon from the task bar, and then point and leftclick [Options] from the displayed menu.
The [SmartNetMonitor for Client-Options] window is displayed.
C Select the printer you want to use, check [To be Monitored], and then click [OK].
D Right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon from the task bar, and then point and leftclick the printer you want to monitor.
The [Status] window of the target printer to be monitored is opened.
E Click the [Configuration] tab to find the amount of paper in the Paper Tray, etc..
Note
❒ For more information about how to use each item, see the SmartNetMonitor for Client Help file.
238
Operating Instructions Client Reference
239
Web Browser
A Start up the web browser.
B Type "http://(the IP address of the printer you want the status to be displayed)" for the address.
The status of the selected printer is displayed on the web browser.
C Click [Status] to find the amount of paper in the Paper Tray, etc..
Note
❒ For more information about how to use each item, see the Web Status Monitor Help file.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
11. Appendix
Color Guide
Color Printing Basics
Additive (Emitted) and Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models
All lights are a mixture of red, green, and blue, which are normally called the RGB color model. When
red, green, and blue are of equal intensities, the RGB color model produces white.
Note
❒ RGB is also called additive or emitted color. The colors on your computer screen are produced by
varying the intensities of RGB.
240
Operating Instructions Client Reference
241
Printed color is a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, which are normally called the CMY color model. When mixed in equal proportions the CMY color model produces black.
Note
❒ CMY is also called subtractive or reflective color. The printer uses CMY toner plus K (black) toner
(CMYK color model) to provide full color printing.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
242
The colors of the RGB color model can be mixed to produce the cyan, magenta, and yellow of the CMY
color model and vice versa. Two colors of one model are mixed to produce the color of the other model
(mixing blue and green produces cyan, for example). The remaining color is the complement of the
color produced (red in this example). Complementary colors are: red and cyan, green and magenta, blue
and yellow.
Printed Color
The printer produces full-color output using four toner colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These
four colors make up the CMYK color model.
Note
❒ Mixing CMY in equal proportions should hypothetically produce pure black, but imperfections in the
ink cause an equal measure of these colors to produce a muddy or dark brown. Black toner is added
to the color model in order to make it possible to produce pure black.
For example, if the image is created with cyan only, there is no problem in printing all of it with cyan
toner. However, full-color images are actually comprised of 10,000s of fine colors. These fine colors
can be expressed by changing the ratio of CMYK toner particles to be printed per unit surface.
There are also dark and light shadings to each color. These shadings can be expressed by changing the
amount of toner particles to be printed per unit surface.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
243
Collate
Reference
For more information about collate and job separation, see the printer driver's Help file.
❖ Collate
Outputs can be assembled as sets in sequential order.
Limitation
❒ To use these functions, the optional Memory Unit of at least 128 MB or the optional Hard Disk Drive
must be installed on the printer.
❒ Up to 150 pages can be sorted using RAM. If the optional Hard Disk Drive is installed, up to 1000
pages can be sorted.
Operating Instructions Client Reference
INDEX
244
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing
Windows 2000, 59
Windows 95/98/Me, 27
Windows NT 4.0, 126
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing
Windows 2000, 57
Windows 95/98/Me, 25
Windows NT 4.0, 124
Windows XP, 91
Configuring the Protocols
Windows 2000, 57
Windows 95/98/Me, 25
Windows NT 4.0, 124
Windows XP, 91
1394 Utility, 171
A
Additive (Emitted) Color Models, 240
Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000, 171
B
Bidirectional transmission, 47, 82, 115, 143
C
Changing the Zone (Macintosh), 158
Changing to EtherTalk, 156
Checking the Error Log, 228
Checking the Error log, 236
Checking the Printer Status, 238
CMY, 241
CMY color model, 241
Collate, 243
Color Guide, 240
color models, 240
Color Printing Basics, 240
configuration
Macintosh, 145
NetWare, 159
Windows 2000, 51
Windows NT 4.0, 118
Windows XP, 85
D
Deleting a Sample Print File, 226
Deleting the Locked Print File, 234
E
Entering the Password, 232
EtherTalk, 156
I
Installing Software
Windows 2000, 60
Windows 95/98/Me, 28
Windows NT 4.0, 128
Windows XP, 93
Operating Instructions Client Reference
245
L
LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 126
M
Macintosh, 145
ColorSync, installing, 150
N
NetWare, 159
NetWare Configuration
Windows 2000, 162
Windows 95/98/Me, 159
Windows NT 4.0, 168
WindowsXP, 165
P
PageMaker, 50
PCL 5c, 174
PostScript, 174
printer driver, 173
printer name, 157
Printing a Locked Print File, 230
Printing the Remaining Sets, 224
Printing with a Print Server
Windows 2000, 51
Windows 95/98/Me, 19
Windows NT 4.0, 118
Windows XP, 85
Printing without Using a Print Server
Windows 2000, 57
Windows 95/98/Me, 25
Windows NT 4.0, 124
Windows XP, 91
Printing with Parallel Connection
Windows 2000, 72
Windows 95/98/Me, 39
Windows NT 4.0, 139
Windows XP, 104
R
RGB, 240
RGB color model, 240
S
Sample Print, 222
Setting Up Options
Windows 2000, 82
Windows 95/98/Me, 47
Windows NT 4.0, 143
Windows XP, 115
Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job, 181
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 176
SmartNetMonitor for Client, 178
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM, 171
Sorting copies into sets, 243
Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models, 240
Operating Instructions Client Reference
246
T
troubleshooting, 238
U
USB Printing Support, 171
W
Windows 2000, 51
printer properties, PostScript 3, 209
printer properties, RPCS, 183, 197
Windows 95/98/Me
printer properties, PostScript 3, 206
printer properties, RPCS, 181, 194
Windows 95/98/Me Configuration, 19
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows NT 4.0
canceling a job, 220
Windows NT 4.0, 118
document defaults, PostScript 3, 216
document defaults, RPCS, 192, 204
printer properties, PostScript 3, 215
printer properties, RPCS, 190, 203
Windows XP, 85
printer properties, PostScript 3, 212
printer properties, RPCS, 187, 200
Operating Instructions Client Reference
247
Copyright © 2002
Operating Instructions Client Reference
248
EE
GB
G081-6610